Sharp DVD VCR Combo DV RW340U User Manual
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
DV-RW340U  
DV-RW350U  
OPERATION MANUAL  
Please read this Operation Manual carefully before using  
your VCR/DVD RECORDER COMBINATION.  
INSTRUCCIONES EN ESPAÑOL INCLUIDAS.  
The region number for  
this unit is 1.  
1
Supplied Accessory  
• Remote control  
(9HSNB114UD)  
with two “AA” size  
batteries  
• Round Coaxial cable • Audio/Video cables  
(9HSWPZ0901TM003) (9HSWX1E56B5-001) (9HS1VMN20224)  
• Operation Manual  
• QUICK USE GUIDE  
(9HS1VMN20237)  
Operation Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Precautions (cont’d)  
Important Safeguards  
should be read before the appliance is operated.  
2. Retain Instructions- The safety and operating instructions  
should be retained for future reference.  
3. Heed Warnings - All warnings on the appliance and in the  
operating instructions should be adhered to.  
4. Follow Instructions - All operating and use instructions  
should be followed.  
1. Read Instructions - All the safety and operating instructions  
information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and  
supporting structure,grounding of the lead-in wire to an anten-  
na discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of  
antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes,  
and requirements for the grounding electrode. (Fig.A)  
FIGURE A  
ANTENNA  
LEAD  
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING  
WIRE  
AS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE  
GROUND  
CLAMP  
5. Cleaning - Unplug this video product from the wall outlet  
before cleaning.Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol clean-  
ers. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.  
ANTENNA  
DISCHARGE UNIT  
(NEC SECTION 810-20)  
EXCEPTION: A product that is meant for uninterrupted  
service and, that for some specific reason, such as the pos-  
sibility of the loss of an authorization code for a CATV con-  
verter, is not intended to be unplugged by the user for  
cleaning or any other purpose, may exclude the reference  
to unplugging the appliance in the cleaning description oth-  
erwise required in item 5.  
6.Attachments - Do not use attachments not recommended by  
the video product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.  
7. Water and Moisture- Do not use this video product near water,  
for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry  
tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, and the like.  
ELECTRIC  
SERVICE  
EQUIPMENT  
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS  
(NEC SECTION 810-21)  
GROUND CLAMP  
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE  
S2898A  
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING  
ELECTRODE SYSTEM  
(NEC ART 250, PART H)  
15. Lightning - For added protection for this video product dur-  
ing a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and  
unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall out-  
let and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will  
prevent damage to the video product due to lightning and  
power-line surges.  
8.Accessories - Do not place this video product on an unsta-  
ble cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table.The video product  
may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and seri-  
ous damage to the appliance. Use only  
with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table  
recommended by the manufacturer, or  
sold with the video product.Any mount-  
ing of the appliance should follow the  
manufacturer's instructions and should  
use a mounting accessory recommended  
by the manufacturer.  
16. Power Lines -An outside antenna system should not be locat-  
ed in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric  
light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power  
lines or circuits.When installing an outside antenna system,  
extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such  
power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal.  
17. Overloading - Do not overload wall outlets and extension  
cords as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.  
18. Object and Liquid Entry - Never push objects of any kind  
into this video product through any openings as they may  
touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that  
could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of  
any kind on the video product.  
19. Servicing - Do not attempt to service this video product  
yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to  
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
20. Damage Requiring Service - Unplug this video product from  
the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service per-  
sonnel under the following conditions:  
a.When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.  
b. If liquid has been spilled,or objects have fallen into the video  
product.  
9. Transportation - A product and cart combination should be  
moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven sur-  
faces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn.  
10.Ventilation - Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided  
for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the video  
product and to protect it from overheating, and these open-  
ings must not be blocked or covered.The openings should  
never be blocked by placing the video product on a bed,  
sofa, rug, or other similar surface.This video product should  
not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or  
rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufac-  
turer's instructions have been adhered to.  
11. Power Sources - This video product should be operated  
only from the type of power source indicated on the mark-  
ing label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to  
your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power  
company. For products intended to operate from battery  
power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.  
12. Grounding or Polarization - This video product is equipped  
with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having  
one blade wider than the other).This plug will fit into the  
power outlet only one way.This is a safety feature. If you are  
unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing  
the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your elec-  
trician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the  
safety purpose of the polarized plug.  
13. Power Cord Protection - Power supply cords should be  
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or  
pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying par-  
ticular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles,  
and the point where they exit from the appliance.  
c. If the video product has been exposed to rain or water.  
d. If the video product does not operate normally by follow-  
ing the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls  
that are covered by the operating instructions as an improp-  
er adjustment of other controls may result in damage and  
will often require extensive work by a qualified technician  
to restore the video product to its normal operation.  
e. If the video product has been dropped or damaged in any way.  
f.When the video product exhibits a distinct change in per-  
formance this indicates a need for service.  
21. Replacement Parts - When replacement parts are required,  
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts  
specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteris-  
tics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may  
result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.  
22. Safety Check - Upon completion of any service or repairs to  
this video product, ask the service technician to perform  
safety checks to determine that the video product is in  
proper operating condition.  
14. Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna or cable  
system is connected to the video product, be sure the antenna  
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection  
against voltage surges and built-up static charges.Article 810 of  
the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70, provides  
23. Heat -This video product should be situated away from heat  
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other  
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Precautions (cont’d)  
Location and Handling  
Location and Handling  
• Do not cover or place the unit in enclosed spaces to prevent excessive temperature build up.  
• Do not place the unit in direct sunlight, or near heat sources.  
• Depending on the use environment, the temperature of the unit may increase slightly.This is not a malfunction.  
• Keep the unit away from strong magnetic objects.  
• Do not stand the unit vertically. Install the unit in a horizontal and stable position.  
• Do not place any object containing water or other liquids on the unit. In the event that liquid should enter the cabinet, unplug the  
unit immediately and contact the retailer or service centre approved by SHARP immediately.  
•
Do not remove the unit cabinet.Touching parts inside the cabinet could result in electric shock and/ or damage to the unit. For ser-  
vice and adjustment inside the cabinet, call a qualified dealer or service centre approved by SHARP.  
Nonuse Periods  
Location and Handling  
• When the unit is not being used, switch the unit to the Standby mode.  
• When left unused for a long period of time, the unit should be unplugged from the household AC outlet.  
• Do not place the unit in direct sunlight, or near heat sources.  
Copy Protection  
This Unit supports Macrovision copy protection.  
On DVD discs that include a copy protection code, if the contents of the DVD disc are copied using this unit, the copy protec-  
tion code prevents the DVD or videotape copy from playing normally.  
Apparatus Claims of U.S. Patent Nos. 4,631,603, 4,577,216, 4,819,098 and 4,907,093 licensed for limited viewing uses only.  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and  
other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protec-  
tion technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses  
only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
Notice for progressive scan outputs  
Consumers should note that not all high definition television sets are fully compatible with this product and may cause artifacts  
to be displayed in the picture. In case of 525 progressive scan picture problems, it is recommended that the user switch the  
connection to the ‘standard definition’ output. If there are questions regarding our TV set compatibility with this model 525p  
DVD player, please contact our customer service center.  
No Fingers or Other Objects Inside  
Do not put your fingers or objects on the disc tray or in the cassette compartment.  
Warning of Dew Formation  
Moisture may form inside the unit under the following conditions:  
• Immediately after a heater is turned on.  
• In a steamy or humid room.  
• When the unit is suddenly moved from a cold to warm environment.  
If moisture forms inside this unit, it may not operate properly or damage the videotape. In such case, turn on the power and  
wait for more than two hours for the moisture to evaporate.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories.  
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Precautions (cont’d)  
Others  
It is the intent of Sharp that this product be used in full compliance with the copyright laws of the United States and that prior  
permission be obtained from copyright owners whenever necessary.  
“Licensed under one or more of U.S. Pat. 4,972,484, 5,214,678, 5,323,396, 5,530,655, 5,539,829, 5,544,247, 5,606,618,  
5,610,985, 5,740,317, 5,777,992, 5,878,080, or 5,960,037.”  
A NOTE ABOUT RECYCLING  
This product’s packaging materials are recyclable and can be reused. Please dispose of any materials in accordance with your  
local recycling regulations.  
Batteries should never be thrown away or incinerated but disposed of in accordance with your local regulations concerning  
chemical wastes.  
Make your contribution to the environment!!!  
• Used up batteries do not belong in the dust bin.  
•You can dispose of them at a collection point for used up batteries or special waste.  
Contact your council for details.  
Maintenance  
SERVICING  
1. Please refer to relevant topics in the Troubleshooting on pages 97-100 before returning the product.  
2. Do not attempt to service this Unit yourself. Instead, unplug it and contact a Sharp Authorized Service Center for inspection.  
(See CONSUMER LIMITED WARRANTY at the end of this manual.)  
3. Be sure the service technician uses authorized replacement parts or their equivalents. Unauthorized parts may cause fire, elec-  
trical shock, or other hazards.  
4. Following any service or repair, be sure the service technician performs safety checks to certify that this Unit is in safe operat-  
ing order.  
CLEANINGTHE CABINET  
¡Use a soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use a solution containing alcohol, spirits, ammonia or  
abrasive.  
CLEANING DISCS  
¡When a disc becomes dirty, clean it with a cleaning cloth.Wipe the disc from the center out. Do not wipe in a circular motion.  
¡Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners, detergent, abrasive cleaning agents or antistatic  
spray intended for analogue records.  
RECOMMENDED MEASURES FOR OPTIMUM PICTURE EXCELLENCE  
This Unit is a precision device constructed using extremely accurate technology.  
¡The disc cannot be played if the disc drive component is worn out or if the internal pick up lens is dirty.  
¡If this unit still does not perform properly although you refer to the relevant sections and toTroubleshooting on pages 97-100,  
the laser optical pickup unit may be dirty. Consult a Sharp Authorized Service Center for inspection and cleaning of the laser  
optical pickup unit.  
DISC HANDLING  
¡Handle the discs so that fingerprints and dust do not adhere to the surfaces of the discs.  
¡Always store the disc in its protective case when it is not used.  
AUTO HEAD CLEANING  
¡Automatically cleans video heads as you insert or remove a videotape, so you can see a clear picture.  
¡Playback picture may become blurred or interrupted while the TV program reception is clear. Dirt accumulated on the video  
heads after a long period of use, or the usage of rental or worn videotape can cause this problem. If a streaky or snowy picture  
appears during playback, the video heads in your unit may need to be cleaned.  
1. Please visit your local Audio/Video store and purchase a good qualityVHSVideo Head Cleaner.  
2. If aVideo Head Cleaner does not solve the problem,please call our help line mentioned on page 103 to locate a SharpAuthorized  
Service Center.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Table of contents  
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
Before you start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
Table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
Functional overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
Installing batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . .10  
Using a remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
TheVCR/DVD recorder Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
SETUP/DISC/CD menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
DISPLAY menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
Title/Chapter search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
Track search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Time search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Repeat/Random/Program play . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Repeat play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Random play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Program play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Selecting the format of audio and video . . . . . .56  
Switching audio soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
Switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Reducing block noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Connection to aTV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Connection to a cable box or satellite box . . . .15  
Connection to an Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . .16  
Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Information on disc editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Guide to a title list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Editing discs inVideo mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Editing discs inVR mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVideo mode . . . . . . . .61  
Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Putting names on titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Setting or clearing chapter markers . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Original) . .65  
Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Deleting parts of titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Putting names on titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
Setting or clearing chapter markers . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
Setting pictures for thumbnails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70  
Setting titles to protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72  
Releasing titles from protecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Playlist) . . .74  
Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74  
Deleting parts of titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
Putting names on titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
Setting or clearing chapter markers . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
Setting pictures for thumbnails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Adding titles to a Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
Deleting a Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82  
Editing DVD-R discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
Putting names on titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17  
Easy DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17  
Channel setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
Getting channels automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
Adding/deleting channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
Selecting theTV stereo or SAP . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Setting the clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Auto Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Manual Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Setting the daylight saving time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25  
Selecting theTV aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26  
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
Information on DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
Recording speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
Restrictions on recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
Information on copy control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Making discs playable in other DVD player (Finalize) 28  
Formatting a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
Choosing the recording format of a blank disc . . . .29  
Reformatting a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
Basic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Checking the recording picture quality . . . . . . . . . .32  
One-touch timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
Hints for timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
Settings for an external source . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
Connection to an external source . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
Recording from an external source . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
Dubbing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
Finalizing the discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Setting a disc to protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
Changing the SETUP menu . . . . . . . . .85  
Tour of the SETUP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
Language setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
Display setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
Audio setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90  
Settings for Parental lock level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92  
VCR functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
Recording and One-touch timer recording . . . .94  
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
One-touch timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
Index search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
Time search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
Other operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
Information on DVD play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
Guide to displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
Playing discs using the disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46  
Playing discs using the title menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Special playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48  
Resume play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48  
Fast forward / Fast reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48  
Skipping TV commercials during play . . . . . . . . . . . . .49  
Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49  
Step by step playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
Slow forward / Slow reverse play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Marker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
RF converter output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100  
Language code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
Service Information (For the U.S.) . . . . . . . . . .103  
6
Español . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Features  
This unit not only plays DVDs, CDs andVHS tapes but also offers features for you to record to DVD discs  
and edit them after that.The following features are offered with this unit.  
Recording  
DVD mode VCR mode  
Editing  
DVD mode  
This unit is compatible with both DVD-RW, which is rewritable  
repeatedly, and DVD-R, which is available for recording once.  
Also, this unit allows you to record to the videotape. You can  
choose either one for your convenience.  
Setting/Clearing chapter markers:  
You can easily add chapter markers anywhere in your  
recordings for easy editing. (VR mode)  
Making your own Playlist:  
Up to 8 programs recording:  
With the original remains as it is, you can edit titles on  
Various playlist as you prefer.  
You can program the unit to record up to 8 programs, up  
to a year in advance. Daily or weekly program recordings  
are also available.  
Putting names on titles.  
Setting pictures for thumbnails.  
Setting/clearing chapter markers.  
Deleting parts of titles, etc.  
One-touch timer recording:  
You can easily set a recording time as you prefer. Every  
time the REC/OTR button on the remote control or on  
the front panel pressed during recording, the recording  
time will be increased by 30 minutes up to 8 hours.The  
recording automatically stops when the recording time  
you set is reached.  
Protecting titles:  
To avoid editing or erasing titles, the protect function is  
useful when it is ON in the original list.  
Compatibility  
DVD mode  
Dubbing mode:  
You can copy a DVD disc to a videotape or copy a video-  
tape to a DVD disc.This function will be possible only if  
the DVD disc or a videotape is not copy protected.  
You cannot record on a videotape when its record tab is  
removed.  
Available for playing discs recorded inVideo mode  
on a regular DVD player (Video mode):  
Discs recorded in theVideo mode can be played on regular  
DVD players, including computer DVD drives compatible with  
DVD-Video playback*.You will need to finalize the discs  
recorded inVideo mode to play in other DVD players.  
* DVD-Video Format (Video mode) is a new format for record-  
ing on DVD-RW/R discs that was approved by the DVD Forum  
in 2000.Adoption of this format is optional for manufactures of  
DVD playback devices and there are DVD-Video players, DVD-  
ROM drives or other DVD playback devices that do not play  
DVD-RW/R discs recorded in the DVD-Video Format.  
DVD mode  
REC MONITOR:  
You can confirm the picture quality for recording in the current  
recording speed which you set.  
If you want to change the recording speed, press REC  
MODE/REC SPEED button to set the desired recording mode.  
Automatic Chapter marker setting:  
Chapter markers will be put on recordings as you set in  
SETUP menu before attempting to record.  
AutomaticTitle menu making:  
The unit makes title menus automatically when finalizing  
the disc which are recorded inVideo mode.  
Automatic PLAYLIST making (VR mode):  
A Playlist will be prepared from an Original list, so that  
you can edit titles in a Playlist as you prefer.  
An Original list is kept as it is.  
Others  
Progressive Scan system  
Unlike conventional interlace scanning, the progressive scan  
system provides less flickering and images in higher resolu-  
tion than that of traditional television signals.  
Symbol in this operation manual  
Many functions of this unit are depending on the disc type or the  
recording mode.  
Play  
DVD mode  
To specify for what disc type or recording mode each function is, we  
put the following symbols at the beginning of each item to operate.  
Theater surround sound in your home:  
When connecting the unit to an amplifier or a decoder which is  
compatible with Dolby Digital or DTS, you are allowed to expe-  
rience the theater surround sound from discs with surround  
sound system.  
Quick search for what you want to watch:  
You can easily find the part you want to watch using the search  
function. Search for a desired point on a disc by title, chapter, or  
time.  
Symbol  
Description  
Available to DVDVideo discs  
DVD-V  
Available to DVD-RW inVideo mode  
Available to DVD-RW inVR mode  
Available to DVD-R discs  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
Available to DVD+RW inVideo mode  
DVD+RW  
Start to play from Original and Playlist (VR mode):  
Available to DVD+R discs  
Available to Audio CDs  
DVD+R  
CCDD  
Title playing is available from either an Original list or Playlist.  
VCR mode  
Available to CD-RW/R discs with  
MP3 files  
Available toVHS tapes  
Quick search for what you want to watch:  
You can easily find the part you want to watch using the Index  
search/Time search functions.An index mark will be assigned at  
the beginning of each recordings you make. For Time search func-  
tion, you can go to a specific point on a videotape by entering  
the exact amount of time you wish to skip.  
MP3  
Use only  
this unit.  
tapes marked with  
VCR  
Indicates that you need to select the DVD  
mode by pressing DVD button on the  
remote control before proceeding next step.  
DVD  
First:  
(Press:)  
Indicates that you need to select theVCR  
mode by pressingVCR button on the  
remote control before proceeding next step.  
VCR  
First:  
(Press:)  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Functional overview  
2
3* 4 5  
6
Front Panel  
OPEN/CLOSE  
STOP/EJECT  
PLAY  
STOP  
PLAY  
POWER  
S-INPUT  
VIDEO L(MONO)  
-
AUDIO  
-
R
( ) The unit can also  
*
REW F.FWD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
be turned on by  
pressing these  
buttons.  
20  
1
21 19 18 17 16  
15 14 13 12* 11* 10 9 8 7  
1. POWER button / indicator (DVD/VCR)  
Press to turn the unit on and off.  
12. STOP button (DVD)*  
Press to stop playback or recording.  
Press to stop the proceeding timer recording in DVD.  
13. OUTPUT SELECT button (DVD/VCR)  
Press to select the component you wish to operate.  
14. DUBBING button (DVD/VCR)  
If timer programmings have been set, press to set the  
unit in timer-standby mode. Press to cancel the timer  
standby mode, then turn the unit on.  
Red LED lights up when power is on.  
2. Cassette compartment (VCR)  
Insert a videotape here.  
Press to startVCR to DVD (DVD toVCR) duplication  
which you set in the SETUP menu.  
3. A OPEN/CLOSE button (DVD)*  
Press to open or close the disc tray.  
15. CHANNEL L / K button (DVD/VCR)  
Press to change the channel up and down.  
16. PLAY button (VCR)  
4. VCR indicator  
This indicator appears when theVCR output mode is selected.  
5. DVD indicator  
Press to start playback.  
17. Remote control sensor (DVD/VCR)  
Receive signals from your remote control so that you  
can control the unit from a distance.  
This indicator appears when the DVD output mode is selected.  
6. Disc tray (DVD)  
Place a disc when open.  
18. REC/OTR button (VCR)  
7. AUDIO INPUT jacks (LINE2) (DVD/VCR)  
Use to connect external equipment with standard audio cables.  
8. VIDEO INPUT jack (LINE2) (DVD/VCR)  
Use to connect external equipment with a standard video cable.  
9. S-VIDEO INPUT jack (LINE2) (DVD only)  
Use to connect the S-Video output of external equip-  
ment with an S-Video cable.  
Press once to start a recording. Press repeatedly to  
start a One-Touch timer Recording.  
19. F.FWD button (VCR)  
Press to rapidly advance the videotape, or view the pic-  
ture rapidly in forward during playback. (Forward Search)  
20. REW button (VCR)  
Press to rewind the videotape, or to view the picture rapid-  
ly in reverse during the playback mode. (Rewind Search)  
21. STOP/EJECT button (VCR)  
10. REC/OTR button (DVD)  
Press once to start recording.  
Press repeatedly to start a One-Touch timer Recording.  
11. PLAY button (DVD)*  
EJECTbutton-Press to remove the videotape from the  
cassette compartment when the power is on or off.  
STOP button-Press to stop videotape playback.  
Press to stop the proceeding timer recording inVCR.  
Press to start or resume play.  
1
2 3 4 5  
6
Rear Panel  
DVD  
AUDIO S-VIDEO  
DVD/VCR  
COMPONENT  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT OUT  
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA  
VIDEO OUT  
IN  
Y
L
L
L
R
R
PB/CB  
COAXIAL  
IN  
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT  
OUT  
R
PR/CR  
OUT  
•
These jacks are  
useful only in  
DVD mode.  
12 11 10  
9 8  
7
1. AC Power Cord (DVD/VCR)  
8. VIDEO OUTPUT jack (DVD/VCR)  
Use to connect a TV monitor,AV receiver or other  
equipment with a standard video cable.  
9. VIDEO INPUT jack (LINE1) (DVD/VCR)  
Use to connect external equipment with a standard  
video cable.  
Connect to a standard AC outlet to supply power to this unit.  
2. S-VIDEO INPUT jack (LINE1) (DVD only)  
Use to connect the S-Video output of external equip-  
ment with an S-Video cable.  
3. COMPONENTVIDEO OUTPUT jacks (DVD only)  
Use to connect a TV monitor with component video  
inputs with component video cables.  
10. S-VIDEO OUTPUT jack (DVD only)  
Use to connect the S-Video input of a TV monitor,AV  
receiver or other equipment with an S-Video cable.  
11. AUDIO OUTPUT jacks (DVD only)  
Use to connect a TV monitor,AV receiver or other  
equipment with standard audio cables.  
4. AUDIO INPUT jacks (LINE1) (DVD/VCR)  
Use to connect external equipment with standard  
audio cables.  
5. AUDIO OUTPUT jacks (DVD/VCR)  
Use to connect a TV monitor,AV receiver or other  
equipment with standard audio cables.  
12. COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT jack  
(DVD only)  
6. TV ANTENNA IN jack (DVD/VCR)  
Use to connect an antenna.  
Use to connect an AV receiver, Dolby Digital decoder  
or other equipment with a coaxial digital input jack  
with a digital coaxial cable.  
7. TV ANTENNA OUT jack (DVD/VCR)  
Use to connect an antenna cable to pass the signal  
from the TV ANTENNA IN to your TV monitor.  
Note: Do not touch the inner pins of the jacks on the rear panel. Electrostatic discharge may cause perma-  
nent damage to the unit.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Functional overview (cont’d)  
Remote Control  
7. SETUP button (DVD/VCR)  
Press to display the setup menu.  
During DVD playback, press and  
hold for more than 3 seconds  
to switch to the progressive  
scanning mode or the interlace  
mode.  
18. VIDEO/TV button (DVD/VCR)  
Press to selectVIDEO or TV  
position.  
14  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
1
15*  
19. SLOW button (VCR)  
During playback, press to  
view the videotape in slow  
motion.  
16  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
17  
2
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
18  
19  
SPACE  
0
8. REC MONITOR button (DVD)  
Press to check the video signal  
to be recorded before  
20. PAUSE F button  
(DVD/VCR)  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
20  
3
5
Press to pause play or recording.  
21. DVD button  
4
7
21  
23  
22*  
attempting.  
PLAY  
9. MENU/LIST button (DVD)  
Press to display the Disc menu.  
Press to change ORIGINAL  
and PLAYLIST on the TV  
screen.  
Press to activate the remote  
control in DVD mode. (Refer  
to page 10)  
STOP  
24*  
26  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
25  
27  
28  
29  
6
8
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Press to select the DVD out-  
put mode.  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
9
10  
12  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
(VR mode only)  
22. PLAY B button *  
(DVD/VCR)  
11  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
10. TOP MENU button (DVD)  
Press to display the top menu.  
11. CLEAR/C.RESET button  
(DVD/VCR)  
30  
Press to start or resume play.  
23. D button (DVD/VCR)  
• DVD mode  
13  
• DVD mode  
During playback, press to fast  
forward.  
Or when playback is paused,  
press to play slow forward.  
•VCR mode  
Press to clear the password once  
entered, to cancel the program-  
ming for CD, to clear the select-  
ing marker number in the marker  
setup mode or to clear the pro-  
gram once entered in the timer  
recording setting mode,etc.  
•VCR mode  
( ) In DVD mode, the unit can also be  
*
turned on by pressing these buttons.  
1. POWER button (DVD/VCR)  
Press to turn the unit on and off.  
If timer programmings have  
been set, press to set the unit  
in timer-standby mode. Press  
to cancel the timer standby  
mode, then turn the unit on.  
2. Number buttons (DVD/VCR)  
Press to select channel numbers.  
Press to select a title/chap-  
ter/track on display or a TV  
channel.  
Press to rapidly advance the  
videotape or view the picture  
rapidly in forward during playback.  
24. STOP C button *  
(DVD/VCR)  
Press to stop playback or  
recording.  
25. TIMER PROG. button  
(DVD/VCR)  
Press to reset the tape counter.  
12. SEARCH MODE button (VCR)  
Press to call up the index or  
time search menu.  
13. CM SKIP button (DVD)  
During playback, press to skip  
30 seconds.  
Press to display the timer  
program setting menu.  
26. ENTER button  
(DVD/VCR)  
Also press to enter values for  
the settings in the SETUP menu.  
3. DISPLAY button (DVD/VCR)  
Press to display or change the  
on-screen display.  
14. REC MODE/REC SPEED  
button (DVD/VCR)  
Press to switch the recording  
speed.  
Press to confirm or select  
menu items.  
15. OPEN/CLOSE A button (DVD)*  
Press to open or close the  
disc tray.  
27. K / L / { / B buttons  
(DVD/VCR)  
4. VCR button  
Press to activate the remote  
control inVCR mode. (Refer  
to page 10)  
Press to select items or settings.  
16. AUDIO button (VCR)  
During playback a HiFi video-  
tape, press to change the  
AUDIO OUT setting “HiFi”  
and “MONO”.  
28. RETURN  
button  
(DVD/VCR)  
Press to select theVCR out-  
put mode.  
Press to return to the previ-  
ously displayed menu screen.  
29. ZOOM button (DVD)  
During playback, press to  
enlarge the picture on the  
screen.  
5. E button (DVD/VCR)  
• DVD mode  
17. CH K / L buttons (DVD/VCR)  
• DVD mode  
During playback, press to fast  
reverse.  
Press to change the channel  
up and down.  
Or when playback is paused,  
press to play slow reverse.  
•VCR mode  
30. SKIP H button (DVD)  
During playback, press to skip to  
the previous chapter or track.  
Or when playback is paused, press  
to play reverse step by step.  
SKIP G button (DVD)  
During playback, press to skip to  
the next chapter or track.  
•VCR mode  
Press to change the channel  
up and down.  
Press to rewind the videotape or  
to view the picture rapidly in  
reverse during the playback mode.  
6. REC/OTR button (DVD/VCR)  
Press once to start a recording.  
Press repeatedly to start a  
One-Touch timer Recording.  
Press to adjust the tracking  
during playback or in slow  
motion of the videotape.  
Also while playback is in still  
mode, you can adjust the pic-  
ture blurred vertically.  
Or when playback is paused, press  
to play forward step by step.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Functional overview (cont’d)  
Installing batteries in the remote control Using a remote control  
Install two “AA” size batteries (supplied) matching  
the polarity indicated inside battery compartment of  
the remote control.  
Keep in mind the following when using the remote  
control:  
• Make sure that there is no obstacle between the  
remote control and the remote sensor of the unit.  
• Use within the operating range and angle as  
shown.  
1
3
2
• Remote operation may become unreliable if strong  
sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the  
remote sensor of the unit.  
• Remote control for different devices can interfere  
with each other. Avoid using remote control for  
other equipment located close to the unit.  
• Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in  
the operating range of the remote control.  
Note:  
Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such  
as leakage and bursting. Please observe the following:  
• Do not mix new and old batteries together.  
• Do not use different kinds of batteries together,  
although they may look similar, different batteries  
may have different voltages.  
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each  
battery match the indications in the battery com-  
partment.  
• Remove batteries from equipment that is not going  
to be used for a month or more.  
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply  
with governmental regulations or environmental  
public instruction rules that apply in your country  
or area.  
Within about  
PO  
W
ER  
ST  
OP  
/E  
JE  
CT  
PL  
RE  
A
Y
W
F.  
FW  
D
OPEN  
/C  
RE  
C/  
OT  
23feet (7m)  
LO  
SE  
R
(
D
V
D
I
)
I
ST  
OP  
T
PL  
AY  
RE  
C/  
OT  
R
60˚  
Remote  
control  
R
E
C
P
A
U
SE  
k
RE  
h
V
H
SK  
IP  
PL  
B
A
Y
T
OR  
O
P
ST  
OP  
G
IG  
IN EN  
AL U/  
M
C
FW  
g
D
K
EN  
TE  
P
LA EN  
U
IS  
M
R
Y
L
T
• Do not recharge, short-circuit, heat, burn or disas-  
semble batteries.  
TheVCR/DVD recorder Switching  
Because this product is a combination of aVCR and a DVD recorder, you must select first which com-  
ponent you wish to operate with the OUTPUT SELECT button.  
OUTPUT SELECT button  
VCR MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
Press theVCR button on the remote control.  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
STOP/EJECT  
PLAY  
STOP  
PLAY  
POWER  
(Verify that theVCR indicator is lit.)  
REW F.FWD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
DVD MODE  
SPACE  
0
VCR button  
DVD button  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Press the DVD button on the remote control.  
PLAY  
(Verify that the DVD indicator is lit.)  
VCR  
DVD  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
DVD indicator  
VCR indicator  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
OUTPUT SELECT  
Note  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
• Pressing only the OUTPUT SELECT button  
on the front panel DOES NOT switch the mode  
of the remote control.You MUST select the cor-  
rect mode on the remote control.  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
DVD/VCR RECORDER  
• Pressing the SETUP or theTIMER PROG.  
button switches the unit to the DVD mode.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Functional overview (cont’d)  
Guide to Displays on screen menu  
This unit uses the following on screen menu for most operations: SETUP/DISC/CD menu,  
Title list, and DISPLAY menu.They allow you to change the playing status of disc during play.  
The DISPLAY menu also gives you information on the status of the disc or a videotape.  
SETUP/DISC/CD menu  
Press SETUP button to display the setup main menu, then choose either of SETUP/DISC/CD by pressing { /  
buttons.Then, press ENTER button to display each menu.  
These menus provide entries to all main functions of the unit.  
B
“DISC” is available only when a DVD-RW/R disc is  
inserted into the unit.  
When a DVD-Video disc (commercially available),  
new DVD-R disc, or the finalized DVD-R disc is  
inserted into the unit, you cannot select “DISC”.  
“CD” is available only when an  
“SETUP” is available only in the  
Stop mode.  
Audio CD disc or a CD-RW/R  
disc with MP3 files is inserted  
into the unit.  
Setup Menu  
Setup  
Disc Setting  
CD Playback Mode  
CD Playback Mode  
Disc  
Edit  
Random Play  
Program Play  
Format  
Finalize  
1
2
5
3
6
Disc Protect OFF ON  
1 2 3 4  
1 2  
4
Playback Setting  
1. Playback:  
To set up the unit to play discs as  
you prefer.  
1. Edit:  
1. Random Play:  
To activate the random playback  
feature.  
Turns on a title list, (When a disc with  
VR mode is inserted, 'Original' or  
'PlayList' is available.), which shows  
the recorded titles on the disc.  
2. Recording:  
To set up the unit to record to  
discs or videotapes as you prefer.  
2. Program Play(Audio CD  
only):  
To activate the programmed play-  
back feature.  
2. Format (DVD-RW only):  
Allows you to erase all of the  
recorded content on the disc.  
The disc will be completely blank.  
• Erased content cannot be called  
back. Please make sure before you  
format a disc.  
• A DVD-RW disc formatted with  
this unit cannot be used in other  
DVD recorders without any  
recording using this unit.  
• If you want to use a disc only for-  
matted with this unit on another  
DVD recorder, you have to re-for-  
mat the disc on that recorder.  
3. Finalize:  
Allows you to finalize a disc contain-  
ing recorded titles.  
4. Disc Protect (VR mode only) :  
Allows you to protect a disc from  
accidental editing or recording.  
3. Display:  
To set up the OSD screen and the  
front display of the unit as you  
prefer.  
4. SelectVideo:  
To choose a line input to record  
to DVD discs from other video  
equipment.  
5. Clock:  
To set up the clock of the unit as  
you need.  
6. Channel:  
To adjust the channel setting of  
the unit as you prefer.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Functional overview (cont’d)  
DISPLAY menu  
1. Indicates a disc type and a  
format mode.  
DVD mode  
DVD  
First:  
Note: In some descriptions on  
this manual, only one disc type  
is indicated as an example.  
2. Indicates a recording mode  
and possible recording time.  
3. Indicates a current channel  
number and an audio status of  
the program.  
Press DISPLAY button to call up  
the display menu.This menu will  
give you the information on the  
playing disc. Some operations are  
available while disc is playing.  
Details are on page 43.  
4. Indicates a title number, chap-  
ter number and the time  
elapsed of disc play.  
4
1
5. Each icon means:  
DVD-RW  
1
1
00:00:00  
Video mode  
: Search  
SP 1:25 Rem.  
2
CH 1  
STEREO  
:Audio  
5
3
: Subtitle  
:Angle (exceptVR mode)  
: Repeat  
: Marker  
: Noise Reduction  
: Zoom  
VCR mode  
1. Playback status of the current  
videotape.  
VCR  
First:  
2. Indicates a current channel  
number and an audio status of  
the program.  
Press DISPLAY button to call up  
the display menu.  
3. Indicates a recording speed  
only five seconds.  
1
2
4. Indicates a Tape Counter.  
5. Audio status of the current  
videotape.  
CH21  
STEREO  
SP  
0:00:00  
HIFI  
3
4
5
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Functional overview (cont’d)  
Front Panel Display Guide  
4
2
1
3
7
6
5
1. Current status of the unit  
: Appears when a disc or a  
videotape play is paused.  
: Appears when playing a  
disc or a videotape.  
: Appears when the timer  
programming has been  
set and is proceeding.  
: Appears during recording  
process.  
2. Disc type and Current  
3. Recording mode/speed  
Indicates the recording speed of  
the disc or a videotape.  
4. Title/Track and Chapter  
mark  
status of the unit  
:
Appears when an audio CD  
or a disc with MP3 files is  
inserted in the disc tray.  
Appears when a DVD disc  
is inserted in the disc tray.  
Appears when the timer  
recording is proceeding in  
DVD.  
:
: Appears when indicating  
a title/track number.  
: Appears when indicating  
a chapter number.  
:
Appears when DVD is in  
the timer recording stand-  
by mode.  
5. Displays the following  
• Playing time / remaining time  
• Current title / chapter / track  
number  
• Recording time  
• Clock  
• Channel number  
Appears during repeat  
play.  
: Appears when a video-  
tape is in the unit.  
:
Appears when a DVD-R disc  
is inserted in the disc tray.  
:
Appears when a DVD-  
RW disc is inserted in  
the disc tray.  
Appears when the timer  
recording is proceeding in  
VCR.  
• VCR tape counter  
• Remaining time for a one-  
touch timer recording  
:
6.  
: Appears in the after-  
noon with the clock  
displaying.  
Appears whenVCR is in  
the timer recording stand-  
by mode.  
7.  
:
:
Appears when the pro-  
gressive scan system is  
activated.  
Appears duringVCR to DVD  
duplication process.  
:
Appears during DVD toVCR  
duplication process.  
Display message  
Appears when the disc  
tray is opening.  
Appears when a disc is  
loaded on the disc tray.  
Appears when the disc  
tray is closing.  
Appears when data is  
being recorded on a  
disc.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
Connection to aTV  
(Back ofTV)  
Antenna  
Antenna  
Cable  
Signal  
Cable  
Signal  
(Back ofTV)  
3
or  
or  
Connect  
Round Coaxial Cable  
(supplied)  
1
DVD  
AUDIO S-VIDEO  
DVD/VCR  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT OUT  
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA  
Disconnect  
IN  
Y
L
L
L
R
R
PB/CB  
COAXIAL  
IN  
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT  
OUT  
2
R
P
R/CR  
OUT  
Connect  
(Back of this unit)  
4
Plug in the AC power cord of this unit.  
Make one of the following connections, depending on the capabilities of your existing equipment.  
Method 1  
Method 2  
Method 3  
Good picture  
Basic Audio  
Better picture  
Best picture  
TV  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
AUDIO IN  
VIDEO IN  
S-VIDEO IN  
Y
P
B/CB  
PR/CR  
Video  
cable  
(supplied)  
S-Video  
cable  
(commercially  
available)  
Audio cable  
(supplied)  
Component  
Video cables  
(commercially  
available)  
This unit  
DVD  
COMPONENT  
DVD  
S-VIDEO  
DVD/VCR  
DVD/VCR  
VIDEO OUT  
Y
AUDIO OUT  
L
DVD  
S-VIDEO  
DVD/VCR  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO  
OUT  
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA  
T
IN  
Y
L
L
PB/CB  
L
PB/CB  
R
R
R
IN  
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT  
OUT  
R
PR/CR  
VIDEO OUT  
OUT  
PR/CR  
OUT  
or  
DVD  
COMPONENTVIDEO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
S-VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO  
OUT  
DVD  
AUDIO S-VIDEO  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT OUT  
Y
L
L
PB/CB  
COAXIAL  
IN  
R
PR/CR  
OUT  
R
•
These jacks are useful  
only in DVD mode.  
AUDIO OUT  
Note  
• Connect this unit directly to the TV. If the A/V cables are connected to aVCR, pictures may be distorted  
due to the copy protection system.  
• Method 2 and method 3 are only useful in DVD mode.  
• Although you can view images when using the connection Method 1 and 2 while Progressive Scan is acti-  
vated, they are in Interlace mode.  
If yourTV is compatible with Progressive Scan (480p) and you want to  
STOP  
enjoy that high quality picture;  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
You must select the connection Method 3 above and Progressive Scan mode.To set the  
mode, press and hold the SETUP button on the remote control for more than 3 seconds  
during DVD playback, so that “P.SCAN” will appear on the display of this unit.  
If yourTV is not compatible with Progressive Scan;  
Use this unit in Interlace mode. Make sure that no “P.SCAN” is on the display of this unit.  
If not, press and hold the SETUP button on the remote control for more than 3 seconds  
during DVD playback, so that “P.SCAN” on the display of this unit will disappear.  
E
REC MONITOR  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
more than 3 seconds  
during DVD playback  
[Interlace mode]  
[Progressive Scan mode]  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
Connection to a cable box or satellite box  
(Back of this unit)  
Connection A  
(Cable box or  
Satellite box)  
DVD/VCR  
ANTENNA  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
E
Round Coaxial Cable  
(supplied)  
Cable  
Signal  
(Back of TV)  
Select this connection when you want to view or record a scrambled channel.With this connection, channels  
cannot be changed on this unit.You can view or record ONLY the channels you have selected on the cable  
box or the satellite box.  
• While you are recording, only the recorded channel can be viewed.  
To select channels of the cable box or satellite box  
1) Turn on this unit by pressing POWER button.The “POWER” indicator on the front panel will appear.  
Then, press the CHANNEL buttons to select channel 3 or 4 (the same channel as the output channel of  
the cable box or satellite box).  
• If noise appears on the TV screen, pressVIDEO/TV button on the remote control.  
• If you use the channel 4, you will need to change this unit’s RF output to channel 4. Refer to “RF converter  
output” on page 100.  
2) At the TV, select channel 3 or 4 (the same channel as you have selected at step 1).  
3) At the cable box or satellite box, select the channel you want to view or record.  
(Back of this unit)  
Connection B  
DVD/VCR  
ANTENNA  
IN  
(Cable box or  
Satellite box)  
OUT  
E
Cable  
Signal  
IN  
OUT  
(Back of TV)  
Round Coaxial Cable (supplied)  
Round Coaxial Cable  
Select this connection when you want to change channels on this unit.With this connection, you may watch  
one channel while recording another.  
•You may not view or record a scrambled channel.  
To select channels of the cable box or satellite box  
1) At the cable box or satellite box, select channel 3 or 4 (the same channel as this unit’s RF output chan-  
nel.)  
• Refer to “RF converter output” on page 100.  
2) At the TV, select the same channel as the output channel (3 or 4) of the cable box or satellite box.  
3) Turn on this unit by pressing POWER button. The “POWER” indicator on the front panel will appear.  
Then, select the channel you want to view or record.  
• If noise appears on the TV screen, pressVIDEO/TV button on the remote control.  
To playback a DVD disc or a videotape  
Follow the steps 1) to 2) above, to playback a DVD disc or a videotape.  
• Refer to “Playback” on pages 44-45, 94.  
To view one channel while recording another  
1) While you are recording on this unit, pressVIDEO/TV button.  
2) At the cable box or satellite box, select the channel you want to view.  
Note to the Cable TV System Installer :  
This reminder is provided to call the Cable TV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the  
National Electrical Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding - in particular, specifying that the  
cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable  
entry as possible.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Connection to an Audio System  
• When you change the connections, all devices should be turned off.  
• Refer to the operation manual accompanying external devices for more information.  
Method 1  
Method 2  
Stereo system  
Dolby Digital decoder, DTS decoder,  
MD deck or DAT deck  
Analog audio  
input jacks  
AUDIO  
COAXIAL  
Digital audio  
input jack  
Audio Coaxial  
Digital cable  
(commercially  
available)  
Audio cable  
(supplied)  
This unit  
DVD  
DVD/VCR  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
L
AUDIO OUT  
R
COAXIAL  
or  
DVD  
AUDIO  
OUT  
Note  
L
• If output is Dolby Digital encoded audio, connect  
to a Dolby Digital decoder and set “Dolby Digital”  
to “Stream” for the “Digital Out” setting in the  
SETUP menu. (Refer to pages 90-91.)  
R
• If output is DTS encoded audio, connect to a DTS  
decoder and set “DTS” to “ON” for the “Digital  
Out” setting in the SETUP menu. (Refer to pages  
90-91.)  
• The audio source on a disc in a Dolby Digital 5.1  
channel surround format cannot be recorded as  
digital sound by an MD or DAT deck.  
• Unless connected to a Dolby Digital decoder or a  
DTS decoder, set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” and  
“DTS” to “OFF” for the “Digital Out” setting in the  
SETUP menu. Playing a DVD using incorrect settings  
may generate noise distortion and may also damage  
the speakers. (Refer to pages 90-91.)  
• Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” for the “Digital Out”  
setting in the SETUP menu for connecting to an  
MD deck or DAT deck. (Refer to pages 90-91.)  
• By hooking this unit up to a Multi-channel Dolby  
Digital decoder, you can enjoy high-quality Dolby  
Digital 5.1 channel surround sound as heard in the  
movie theaters.  
• By hooking this unit up to the DTS decoder, you  
can enjoy 5.1channel surround system which repro-  
duces the original sound as truthfully as possible.  
5.1channel surround system is developed by the  
Digital Theater System, Inc.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Easy DVD recording  
The following will help you to understand easily how to record to DVD discs.  
Note:  
Make sure batteries are in the remote control and you have connected this unit and the TV correctly.  
Step 1: Choose a disc type  
Step 2: Insert a blank disc  
There are several types of recordable DVD discs  
to choose from. Choose a recordable DVD disc  
type based on your playing/recording/editing  
requirements. See “DVD disc types” at the bot-  
tom of this page for more information on the dif-  
ferences among various compatible media.  
This DVD recorder can record on the following  
type of discs.  
Remote Control  
Open the  
disc tray  
2
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
1
CH  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
Turn on  
the unit  
4.7  
* This unit cannot record on the following discs.  
• DVD-RWVer 1.2 / 2-4x CPRM compatible  
• DVD-R GeneralVer 2.0 / 8x  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
Close the  
disc tray  
3
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
For example, when you want to record repeated-  
ly on the same disc or when you want to edit the  
disc after recording, select the rewritable DVD-  
RW type disc.  
Loading  
When you want to save recordings without any  
alteration, a non-rewritable DVD-R can be your  
choice.  
This operation may take a  
while to be recognized.  
Format the disc  
DVD disc types  
Insert the disc in the unit.  
Then, format the disc from  
SETUP menu.Video format  
(Video mode) orVideo  
recording format (VR mode)  
will be available depending on  
the disc type inserted.This is  
necessary to prepare the disc  
for recording. Details are on  
pages 29-30.  
.
: Most suitable.  
You want to  
RecordTV programs  
: Can be used.  
: Some functions are limited.  
: Cannot be used.  
DVD-RW VR  
DVD-RW Video  
DVD-R  
Reuse by deleting unwanted contents  
Edit recorded contents  
Edit/Record from connected equipment  
Copy discs for distribution  
*1  
*1  
Play on other DVD equipment  
Features  
Recording  
Rewritable?  
DVD-RW VR  
DVD-RW Video  
DVD-R  
When you format, the entire  
contents on that disc will be  
erased.  
• The unit automatically  
starts formatting when an  
unused disc is inserted.  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Can create chapters at fixed intervals (auto.)  
Can create chapters wherever you like (manual)  
Can record 16:9 size pictures  
Can record Copy-Once programs  
Editing  
Can perform basic edit functions  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Can perform advanced edit functions (Playlist edit)  
*1  
DVD-RW (VR mode) can only be played on DVD  
equipment that isVR compatible.  
Note:  
For details of the above functions and implied  
restrictions, see the explanations inside the manual.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Easy DVD recording (Cont’d)  
Step 3: Select the  
Recording  
Step 4: Select the  
desired  
Step 5: Record to  
DVD discs  
speed  
channel  
1
2
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
To select the DVD mode  
1
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CL
POWER  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED 
POWER  
2
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
REC/OTR  
ETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
ENTER  
REC MONITOR  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
USE  
1
To select the recording  
speed  
2
SP 2:01 Rem.  
I
CH 1  
Hint 1: Play the recorded contents  
You can select the title you want to play from a displayed menu and immediately  
start to play. Recorded contents are easily  
accessible, with simple procedure of choos-  
ing a title on a chapter in the menu screen.  
Start Rec.  
Stop/Start  
Stop Rec.  
Step 6: Stop the  
Record  
Title 1  
Title 2  
What are titles and chapters?  
The contents of a DVD disc are generally  
divided into titles.Titles may be further  
divided into chapters.  
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 1 Chapter 2  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SPACE  
0
SLOW  
Hint 2: Edit the recorded disc  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
You will find editing discs is easy.This unit offers convenient edit functions  
which are possible only with DVD-R/RW discs.  
PLAY  
STOP  
You can edit the following from a title list.  
• Putting names on titles  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PR
• Setting pictures for thumbnails (VR mode)  
• Setting/clearing chapter markers  
• Deleting parts of titles or scenes (VR mode)  
Title Delete :This deletes an entire scene permanently from the disc.  
Scene Delete :This allows a user to edit within a specific scene (ex. commercials).  
Original and Playlist (VR mode)  
58%  
You can edit the recordings in Playlist without changing the original record-  
ings.A Playlist does not take up much disc space.  
Writing to Disc  
What “Original” or “Playlist” is for?  
Throughout this manual, you will find Original and Playlist to refer to the actual  
content and the edited version.  
• Original content refers to what’s actually recorded on the disc.  
• Playlist content refers to the edited version of the disc; how the Original  
content is to be played.  
Finalizing a Disc  
• This will allow a disc that is recorded on our unit to be played back on a differ-  
ent DVD player- without finalization it will not be playable on another player.  
This operation may  
take a while to be  
completed.  
•
After finalizing a disc if the recording was in video mode, you can not edit any  
information that is on that disc.  
• If you have recorded inVR mode on DVD-RW disc then editing is still per-  
mitted after finalizing.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Channel setting  
All channels are stored in the unit  
when purchased.We recommend  
that you get available channels in  
your area stored using “Auto  
Preset” in the Channel Preset of  
the SETUP menu.  
4
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
Select “SETUP” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
1
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SETUP menu will appear.  
SPACE  
0
Getting channels auto-  
matically  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Setup  
PLAY  
STOP  
1
3
7
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
Press POWER button to turn  
on the unit.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Playback Setting  
4
5
6
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
2
CM SKIP  
MODE  
5
Turn theTV on and be sure  
to select the input to which  
the unit is connected.  
Select “Channel” using K /  
L
/
{ / B buttons, then press  
To select a channel  
ENTER button.  
You can select a channel by  
Channel Preset menu will appear.  
directly entering channel using  
the Number buttons on the  
remote control.  
Setup > Channel Preset VCR DVD  
Auto Preset  
Notes for using the  
Number buttons:  
Manual Preset  
TV Audio Select  
Stereo  
• When selecting cable channels  
which are higher than 99,  
enter channel numbers as a  
three-digit number.(For exam-  
ple: 117, press 1,1,7)  
•You must precede single-digit  
channel numbers with a zero  
(For example: 02, 03, 04 and  
so on).  
6
3
Select “Auto Preset” using  
K
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
/
L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
The unit will start getting chan-  
nels available in your area.  
•
You can select the line input  
mode (“L1” or “L2”).To select  
“L1” by pressing [0],[0],[1].To  
select “L2” by pressing  
CH 18  
[0],[0],[2].Details are on page 38.  
Auto Presetting Now  
Note  
• If the auto presetting is can-  
celled during presetting, some  
channels not yet preset may  
not be received.  
Setup Menu  
• The selection will depend on  
how you receive the TV chan-  
nels.  
To cancel the auto preset-  
ting during scanning:  
Press RETURN button or  
SETUP button to cancel.  
7
Press SETUP button to exit.  
•You can select only the channels  
memorized in this unit by using  
the CHANNEL buttons.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Channel setting (cont’d)  
Adding/deleting channels  
4
The channels you no longer  
Select “Manual Preset” using  
receive or seldom watch can be  
deleted from the memory.You also  
may add channels into memory.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Manual Preset menu will appear.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
Setup > Channel Preset > Manual Preset  
1
SPACE  
0
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
CH2  
Add  
Delete  
PLAY  
STOP  
1
7
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
2
3
4
5
6
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
5
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Select the channel number to  
add or delete.  
Press { button to move to a  
Setup Menu  
lower channel number.  
Press B button to move to a  
higher channel number.  
2
Select “SETUP” using { /  
B
Setup > Channel Preset > Manual Preset  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
SETUP menu will appear.  
CH18  
Add  
Delete  
Setup  
6
Playback Setting  
Select “Add” or “Delete”  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
The channel number will be  
added or deleted from the chan-  
nel memory.Then, the next chan-  
nel number will appear so that  
you can continue adding or delet-  
ing channels.  
3
Select “Channel” using K /  
L
/
{ / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Channel Preset menu will appear.  
Setup > Channel Preset VCR DVD  
Auto Preset  
7
Manual Preset  
TV Audio Select  
Stereo  
Press SETUP button to exit.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Selecting theTV stereo or SAP  
You can select a sound channel to  
output from TV. “Stereo” has  
been selected as the default.  
4
Select “TV Audio Select”  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
1
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
Setup > Channel Preset VCR DVD  
SPACE  
0
Auto Preset  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Manual Preset  
TV Audio Select  
Stereo  
SAP  
PLAY  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
6
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
2
3
4
5
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
Setup Menu  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
5
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Select “Stereo” or “SAP”  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
2
Select “SETUP” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
Stereo:  
Outputs main-audio.  
SAP:  
SETUP menu will appear.  
(Secondary Audio Program)  
Outputs sub-audio.  
Refer to the item in “Glossary”  
on page 102 for more informa-  
tion.  
Setup  
Playback Setting  
6
Press SETUP button to exit.  
Notes onTV channel audio  
3
•
When you record a TV program available in second audio or stereo on  
a DVD-RW/R or videotape, you have to select either Stereo or SAP in  
the Channel Preset screen beforehand. Refer to the following table to  
check an appropriate setting.  
Select “Channel” using K /  
L
/
{ / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Channel Preset menu will appear.  
Selected  
audio  
Broadcast  
audio  
Disc (Videotape)  
Audio  
recording  
output  
Setup > Channel Preset VCR DVD  
Stereo  
SAP  
STEREO+SAP STEREO  
STEREO  
MONO+SAP  
MONO  
STEREO+SAP SAP  
STEREO  
STEREO  
MONO  
MONO  
SAP  
Auto Preset  
STEREO  
MONO  
MONO  
Manual Preset  
TV Audio Select  
Stereo  
STEREO  
MONO+SAP  
MONO  
STEREO  
SAP  
MONO  
STEREO  
SAP  
MONO  
• As can be seen in the above table, when a TV program is available in  
second audion and you set Channel Preset to SAP, you can only play  
the recording in second audio.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Setting the clock  
Set the clock before you try the  
timer recording. If a Public  
Broadcasting Station (PBS) is available  
in your area, follow Auto Clock  
Setting below. If not, follow Manual  
Clock Setting on pages 23-24.  
4
Select “Auto Clock Setting”  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
7
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
Option window will appear.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
Auto Clock Setting  
Make sure  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
VCR DVD  
Setup > Clock  
SPACE  
0
• The antenna/cable TV connec-  
tions are correct.  
• If this unit is connected to a  
Cable Box or Satellite Box, select  
the local PBS station on them to  
set the clock automatically.  
Clock Setting  
OFF  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Auto Clock Setting  
Auto  
Manual  
Daylight Saving Time  
PLAY  
STOP  
1
6
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
2
3
4
5
1
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
5
CM SKIP  
MODE  
• If you do not know your  
PBS channel number, select  
“Auto” using K / L buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
• If you know your PBS chan-  
nel number, select “Manual”  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Setup Menu  
VCR DVD  
Setup > Clock  
Clock Setting  
OFF  
Set Channel No.  
Auto Clock Setting  
2
CH1  
Daylight Saving Time  
Manual  
Select  
“
SETUP  
”
using { /  
B
but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
SETUP menu will appear.  
Setup  
Enter your PBS channel  
number using Number or  
K
/
L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Playback Setting  
6
Note  
Press SETUP button to exit.  
3
• The clock may set itself auto-  
matically after you connect the  
antenna/cable signal to this  
unit and plug in the power  
cord. In this case, the current  
time will appear on the front  
panel display.  
• If the current time is not dis-  
played or the displayed clock  
is not correct, set the clock  
manually.  
Select “Clock” using K / L / { /  
buttons, then press ENTER button.  
Clock menu will appear.  
B
7
Press POWER button to turn  
off the unit.  
Setup > Clock  
VCR DVD  
This unit will search for the time  
only when the power is off. Leave  
it off for several minutes to give  
this unit time to set the clock on  
the display of the front panel.  
Clock Setting  
Auto Clock Setting  
Daylight Saving Time  
Auto  
ON  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Setting the clock (cont’d)  
Manual Clock Setting  
4
Select “Clock Setting” using  
1
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
A clock setting window will  
appear.  
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
VCR DVD  
Setup > Clock  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Clock Setting  
Auto Clock Setting  
Auto  
ON  
Daylight Saving Time  
PLAY  
- - - / - - / - - - - ( - - - )  
- - : - -  
STOP  
1
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Setup Menu  
2
3
4
5
6
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
Press ENTER button again.  
Default date will appear.  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
2
Select “SETUP” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
5
Enter the date (month / day /  
year) using K / L buttons.  
Press { / B buttons to move  
the cursor.  
SETUP menu will appear.  
Setup  
VCR DVD  
Setup > Clock  
Clock Setting  
Auto Clock Setting  
Auto  
ON  
Daylight Saving Time  
JAN / 12 / 2004 (MON)  
12 : 00AM  
Playback Setting  
3
Select “Clock” using K / L /  
{ / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
6
Enter the time (hour /  
minute) using K / L buttons.  
Press { / B buttons to move  
the cursor.  
Clock menu will appear.  
Setup > Clock  
VCR DVD  
Clock Setting  
Auto Clock Setting  
Daylight Saving Time  
Auto  
ON  
VCR DVD  
Setup > Clock  
Clock Setting  
Auto Clock Setting  
Auto  
ON  
Note  
•
Daylight Saving Time  
JAN / 12 / 2004 (MON)  
09 : 24 AM  
Your clock setting will be lost if  
either there is a power failure  
or this unit has been unplugged  
for more than 30 seconds  
when you set the clock manu-  
ally.  
Instructions continue on page 24.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Setting the clock (cont’d)  
7
8
Press SETUP button to exit.  
Although seconds are not displayed,  
they begin counting from zero.  
Press K / L buttons to select  
AM or PM, then press ENTER  
button.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
Clock menu will appear, then the  
settings will be activated.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
Setup > Clock  
VCR DVD  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Clock Setting  
Auto Clock Setting  
Daylight Saving Time  
Auto  
ON  
PLAY  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
8
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
7
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
When “Auto Clock Setting” is selected to “Auto” or  
“Manual”, change it to “OFF” as following steps.  
Repeat steps (1) to (3) in “Manual Clock Setting”.  
PLAY  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
6
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
4
5
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
Select “Auto Clock Setting”  
Select “OFF” using K /  
L
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
4
5
6
VCR DVD  
Setup > Clock  
Clock Setting  
OFF  
Press SETUP button to exit.  
Auto Clock Setting  
Auto  
Daylight Saving Time  
Manual  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Setting the clock (cont’d)  
Setting the daylight sav-  
ing time  
4
Select “Daylight Saving  
When Daylight Saving Time is  
ON, the clock will automatically  
move forward one hour on the  
first Sunday in April and move  
back one hour on the last Sunday  
in October.  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
Time” using K / L buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
Daylight Saving Time options will  
appear.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
VCR DVD  
Setup > Clock  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Clock Setting  
Auto Clock Setting  
Auto  
1
Daylight Saving Time  
ON  
PLAY  
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
OFF  
STOP  
1
6
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
2
3
4
5
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
5
Select “ON” or “OFF” using  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Choose “ON” when currently  
observing the daylight saving time.  
Setup Menu  
2
6
Select “SETUP” using { /  
B
Press SETUP button to exit.  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
SETUP menu will appear.  
Setup  
Playback Setting  
3
Select “Clock” using K / L /  
{ / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Clock menu will appear.  
Setup > Clock  
VCR DVD  
Clock Setting  
Auto Clock Setting  
Daylight Saving Time  
Auto  
ON  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Selecting theTV aspect ratio  
You can select the TV aspect ratio  
to match the formats of what you  
are playing with the unit and your  
TV screen (4:3 standard or 16:9  
widescreen TV).  
“4:3 Letter Box” has been select-  
ed as the default.  
4
Select “TV Aspect” using K /  
L buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
Option window will appear.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
SPACE  
0
1
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Parental Lock  
4:3 P  
an & Scan  
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
16:9 Wide  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Original  
OFF  
PLAY  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
STOP  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
6
OFF  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
2
3
4
5
Refer to the Note on this  
page.  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
5
Select a desired option using  
Setup Menu  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
2
6
Select “SETUP” using { /  
B
Press SETUP button to exit.  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
SETUP menu will appear.  
Setup  
Playback Setting  
3
Select “Playback” using K /  
L
/
{ / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Playback menu will appear.  
Note  
If you have a standardTV:  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
Select “4:3 Letter Box”, so that  
black bars appear on the top  
and bottom of the screen.  
Select “4:3 Pan & Scan” for a  
full height picture with both  
sides trimmed.  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
Parental Lock  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
OFF  
If you have a widescreenTV:  
Select “16:9 Wide”.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Information on DVD recording  
Information  
Recording speed  
You can select a recording speed among 6 options,  
and the recording time will depend on the record-  
ing speed you select as follows.  
This unit can record to DVD-RW and DVD-R discs.  
When recording, you will need to select a recording  
format betweenVideo mode andVR mode depend-  
ing on the disc format.When recording to DVD-  
RW, a recording format will be “Video mode” or  
“VR mode” because a disc format is available  
between “Video Recording format” and “Video for-  
mat” for DVD-RW.  
Recording Recording  
Video/Sound Quality  
speed  
XP  
time *  
60 min  
SP  
120 min  
240 min  
360 min  
480 min  
600 min  
On the other hand, the disc format for DVD-R is  
always “Video format,” so a recording format will be  
“Video mode”.  
LP  
Logo  
Attributes  
EP  
8cm/12cm, single-sided, single layer disc  
Approx. max. recording time (SEP mode):  
600 minutes (4.7GB) (for 12cm)  
SLP  
SEP  
DVD-RW  
180 minutes (1.4GB) (for 8cm)  
8cm/12cm, single-sided, single layer disc  
Approx. max. recording time (SEP mode):  
600 minutes (4.7GB) (for 12cm)  
*This table is designed for a new single-sided 12cm  
disc as the standard.The recording time are esti-  
mates and actual recording time may differ.  
*The audio and video quality is getting poorer as  
the recording time becomes longer.  
*Discs recorded in SLP or SEP on this recorder  
may not be played back on other DVD recorders  
or DVD players.  
4.7  
180 minutes (1.4GB) (for 8cm)  
DVD-R  
* This unit cannot record on the following discs.  
• DVD-RWVer 1.2 / 2-4x CPRM compatible  
• DVD-R GeneralVer 2.0 / 8x  
AboutVideo mode andVR (Video Recording)  
mode  
Restrictions on recording  
Video mode is the same recording format as DVD-  
Video discs purchased locally, so that you can play in  
most DVD players.To play in other DVD players,  
you will need to finalize (see page 41). If not final-  
ized, you can play, record additionally or edit discs  
recorded inVideo mode with this unit.  
VR (Video Recording) mode is a basic recording  
format for DVD-RW.You can record and edit  
repeatedly.  
You cannot record copy-protected video using this  
unit. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video discs  
and some satellite broadcasts.  
If copy-protected material is encountered during a  
recording, the unit will pause or stop automatically and  
an error message will be displayed on-screen.  
Video that is “copy-once only” can only be recorded  
using a DVD-RW disc inVR mode with CPRM (see  
below).  
When recording a TV broadcast or through an exter-  
nal input, you can display copy control information on  
screen.  
DVD players with  
are capable of playing  
DVD-RW recorded inVR mode.  
What is “CPRM”?  
CPRM is a copy protection system with scram-  
ble system regarding the recording of “copy  
once” broadcast programs. CPRM stands for  
Content Protection for Recordable Media.  
This unit is CPRM compatible, which means  
that you can record copy-once broadcast pro-  
grams, but you cannot then make a copy of  
those recordings. CPRM recordings can only be  
made on DVD-RW discs formatted inVR  
mode, and CPRM recordings can only be played  
on players that are specifically compatible with  
CPRM.  
Disc type Disc format Functions  
Video mode  
Video  
Playing, limited recording,  
limited editing  
DVD-RW  
VR mode  
VR  
Playing, recording,  
Original/Playlist editing  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
Video mode  
Playing, limited recording,  
limited editing  
4.7  
DVD-R  
DVD-R  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Information on DVD recording (cont’d)  
Information on copy control  
Making discs playable in other DVD  
player (Finalize)  
Some satellite broadcasts include copy-protected  
information. For recording these, refer to the fol-  
lowing.  
After recording, you must finalize the disc in order  
to play on other unites. (Refer to page 41.)  
Copy-  
prohibited  
Disc type / format  
Copy-free Copy-once  
ver.1.1  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Playable  
ver.1.1 CPRM compatible  
ver.1.1  
Video  
DVD-RW  
This Unit  
DVD player  
ver.1.1 CPRM compatible  
Not Playable  
ver.2.0  
DVD-R  
Recordable  
Not Recordable  
After finalizing:  
• Once DVD-RW/R (Video mode) is finalized, you  
cannot record additionally or edit.  
Note  
• Even if DVD-RW (VR mode) is finalized, you can  
record additionally or edit the disc.  
• When DVD-RW/R (Video mode) is finalized, title  
menu will be created automatically.  
• The audio and video quality is getting poorer as  
the Recording time becomes longer.  
• This unit cannot record CD-RW or CD-R discs.  
• DVD-RW/R and CD-RW/R discs recorded using  
a personal computer or a DVD or CD recorder  
may not play if the disc is damaged or dirty, or if  
there is dirt or condensation on the pickup lens.  
• If you record a disc using a personal computer,  
even if it is recorded in a compatible format,  
there are cases in which it may not play because  
of the settings of the application software used  
to create the disc. (Check with the software pub-  
lisher for more detailed information.)  
To play in other DVD players, finalize discs  
recorded on this unit with the following  
condition.  
Disc type  
Mode  
DVD-RW  
Video mode  
VR mode  
ver.1.1  
ver.1.1 CPRM compatible  
• Discs recorded in video mode on this DVD  
recorder cannot record additionally using other  
DVD recorders.  
DVD-R  
ver.2.0  
Video mode  
• A DVD-RW disc formatted with this unit cannot  
be used in other DVD recorders without any  
recording using this unit.  
• Since the recording is made by the variable bit  
rate (VBR) method, depending on the picture you  
are recording, the actual remaining time for  
recording may be a little shorter than the  
remaining time displayed on the OSD.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Formatting a disc  
Choosing the recording format of a blank disc  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
When inserting a blank disc, the unit  
starts to initialize the blank disc.  
After that, you can record to the disc  
with the recording format selected in  
SETUP menu.  
You are allowed to set a specified  
time for chapter marks.  
4
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select “DVD-RW Recording  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
Format” using K / L buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
DVD  
Setup > Recording  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Video mode  
DVD-RW Recording Form
Auto Chapter  
1
VR mode  
PLAY  
Timer Programming  
Dubbing Mode  
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
VCR DVD  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
8
Video mode  
DVD Player Compatibility mode.  
VR mode  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Editing possibility mode.  
2
3
4
5
6
7
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
VR mode has been selected as the  
default.  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
5
Select “Video mode” or “VR  
mode” using K / L buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
The recording mode will be set.  
Setup Menu  
2
6
Select “SETUP” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
Select “Auto Chapter” using  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
SETUP menu will appear.  
Option window will appear.  
Setup  
DVD  
Setup > Recording  
DVD-RW Recording Forma
Auto Chapter  
OFF  
5 minutes  
10 minutes  
15 minutes  
30 minutes  
Timer Programming  
Dubbing Mode  
60 minutes  
Playback Setting  
Note  
• When inserting a blank  
DVD+RW or DVD+R disc,  
the error message ("Disc  
Error") will appear.You cannot  
record on a DVD+RW/R. On  
this unit, DVD+RW and  
“10 minutes” has been selected as  
the default.  
3
Select “Recording” using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
7
Select a desired time option  
Recording menu will appear.  
DVD+R are for playback only.  
• PLAYLIST will be created  
automatically when recording  
on DVD-RW inVR mode.  
• The time for chapter marks is  
not accurate inVideo mode.  
• A blank chapter may be creat-  
ed depending on the remain-  
ing time of the disc.  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Chapter marks will be put as you  
specified.  
DVD  
Setup > Recording  
DVD-RW Recording Format  
Auto Chapter  
VR mode  
10 minutes  
Timer Programming  
Dubbing Mode  
VCR DVD  
8
Press SETUP button to exit.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Formatting a disc (cont’d)  
Reformatting a disc  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
4
If you are using a DVD-RW disc,  
by default it will beVR mode.You  
can change this toVideo mode  
from SETUP menu.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
Option window will appear.  
SPACE  
0
1
Disc  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
Edit  
Format  
PLAY  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
STOP  
Yes  
No  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
Are you sure?  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
1
Yes  
No  
2
3
4
5
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
*VR mode only  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
5
Setup Menu  
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Formatting will start.  
2
Select “DISC” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
Disc  
Edit  
58%  
Format  
Formatting  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
6
Formatting is complete.  
*VR mode only  
100% will be indicated.  
3
Select “Format” using K /  
L
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
Option window will appear.  
100%  
Formatting  
Disc  
Edit  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Format  
Finalize  
Note  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
• When you reformat the disc,  
the contents of the disc will  
be erased.  
Yes  
No  
• If you want to cancel format  
at step 5, select “No”.  
*VR mode only  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Basic recording  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
REC MODE  
DVD-R  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
2
4
4
Follow the steps below to record  
TV programs.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
Select a desired channel to  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
4
DVD  
record using CH K / L but-  
tons or number buttons.  
First:  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
1
5
Turn on the unit and load a  
recordable disc.  
CH 1  
PLAY  
STOP  
6
Make sure that the TV input is set  
on the unit.  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
5
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
This operation may take a  
while to be recognized.  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
5
2
Press REC/OTR button to  
start recording.  
Select a recording speed  
using REC MODE/REC  
SPEED button.  
I mark will be displayed for 5  
seconds.  
Note  
SP 2:01 Rem.  
• Recording starts immediately  
and continues until the disc is  
full or you stop recording.  
• When the clock setting has  
not been made, the space for  
a date and time of title names  
in the original or playlist will  
be blank.  
• When you record a TV pro-  
gram which has Stereo and  
SAP-audio on a DVD-RW/R  
(Video mode), you have to  
select the TV channel audio  
(Stereo or SAP) beforehand.  
Only the selected channel audio  
will be recorded. Refer to  
“Selecting the TV stereo or SAP”  
on page 21 for more details.  
• You cannot mix two formats  
on one DVD-RW disc.  
When you load a disc once  
recorded before, the record-  
ing format cannot be changed  
even if you change it in  
I
Refer to “Recording speed” on  
page 27.  
To pause the recording, press  
PAUSE F button. Press REC/OTR  
button to restart the recording.  
3
Make sure that the recording  
format is set to the desired  
mode.  
6
Press STOP C button to stop  
the recording.  
Refer to “Formatting a disc” on  
pages 29-30.  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
When a DVD-RW disc is  
loaded:  
You can chooseVideo mode or  
VR mode from SETUP menu.  
“VR mode” has been selected as  
the default. Refer to “Choosing  
the recording format of a blank  
disc” on page 29.  
SETUP menu.  
• You cannot change the  
recording speed during the  
REC pause mode.  
• You can change a channel  
during the REC pause mode.  
When a DVD-R disc is loaded:  
DVD-R discs will always be in  
Video mode.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Basic recording (cont’d)  
Checking the recording picture quality  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
REC MODE  
DVD-R  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
1
REC SPEED AUDIO  
2
You can confirm the recording pic-  
ture quality with the recording  
speed you have selected before  
attempting to record to a DVD disc.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
Press REC MONITOR button  
again to exit.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
DVD  
First:  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
PLAY  
1
STOP  
While the unit is in STOP or  
REC with a DVD disc to  
record inserted, press REC  
MONITOR button.  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
1
2
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
The TV program will be on the  
screen in the recording picture  
quality with the recording speed  
you have selected.  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
CH 18  
Rec Monitor  
XP  
If you want to change the  
recording speed, press REC  
MODE/REC SPEED button  
repeatedly.  
The recording speed will be  
changed as you press the button  
as shown. Refer to “Recording  
speed” on page 27.  
• You cannot change the record-  
ing speed during recording.  
XP  
SP  
LP  
SEP  
SLP  
EP  
Note  
• You cannot check the record-  
ing sound quality with the  
Rec monitor function.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
One-touch timer recording  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
4
This is a simple way to set the  
recording time in blocks of 30  
minutes. Check that the disc you  
are recording onto has enough  
space for the time you set.  
When the recording finishes the  
recorder automatically goes into  
standby.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
2
Select a desired channel to  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
record using CH K / L but-  
tons or number buttons.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
5
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Press REC/OTR button, then  
press REC/OTR button  
repeatedly until a desired  
recording time (30 minutes  
to 8 hours) appears on theTV  
screen.  
DVD  
PLAY  
First:  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
5
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Turn on the unit and load a  
recordable disc.  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
Recording will start.  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
Make sure that the TV input is set  
on the unit.  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
This operation may take a  
while to be recognized.  
0:30  
I
2
Select a recording speed  
using REC MODE/REC  
SPEED button.  
0:30  
(Normal Recording) 1:00  
Refer to "Recording speed" on  
page 27.  
Note  
8:00  
7:30  
• The remaining recording time  
will appear on the display panel  
during an one-touch timer  
recording. Press DISPLAY but-  
ton to see it on the TV screen.  
• You cannot pause a one-touch  
timer recording.  
• Unlike a timer recording, you  
can perform the following  
operations during a one-touch  
timer recording.  
When the unit reaches the speci-  
fied time, it will turn off automati-  
cally.  
3
Make sure that the recording  
format is set to the desired  
mode.  
To change the recording length  
during the one-touch timer  
recording, press REC/OTR repeat-  
edly untill the desired length  
appear.  
Refer to "Formatting a disc" on  
pages 29-30.  
When a DVD-RW disc is  
loaded:  
You can chooseVideo mode or  
VR mode from SETUP menu.  
"VR mode" has been selected as  
the default. Refer to page 29  
"Choosing the recording format  
of a blank disc."  
- Turning the power off  
- Using REC, STOP C, or  
RETURN buttons.  
To cancel the one-touch timer  
recording within the specified  
time, press STOP C button.  
• The unit will be turned off  
automatically under the follow-  
ing conditions.  
1)No space remained on the disc.  
2)When a power failure occurs.  
• If OTR is finished in DVD dur-  
ing playback or REC mode in  
VCR, the DVD will be in STOP  
mode and theVCR keeps the  
current mode.  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
When a DVD-R disc is loaded:  
DVD-R discs will always be in  
Video mode.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Timer recording  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
You can choose the timer  
programming menu by press-  
ing TIMER PROG. button. In  
this case, continue with step 5.  
4
VCR  
Select “Timer Programming”  
You can program the unit to record  
up to 8 programs, up to a year in  
advance. Daily or weekly program  
recordings are also available.  
• Be sure to set the clock before  
making a timer programming.  
• Insert a recordable disc or a  
videotape with a record tab.  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Timer Programming list will  
appear.  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUD
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
Setup > Recording > Timer Programming  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
DVD  
Date  
- - -  
Start  
End  
CH  
Speed  
VCR  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
IDEO/TV  
SLOW  
- - -  
- - -  
SPACE  
0
1
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
AUSE  
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
5
PLAY  
STOP  
Select the program which is  
1
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
not set up using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
2
3
4
5
6
7
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
6
Enter the date using K /  
L
buttons, then press B button.  
Setup Menu  
Setup > Recording > Timer Programming  
DVD  
Date  
Start  
End  
CH  
Speed  
VCR  
2
JAN / 01 - - : - -AM - - : - -AM CH8 DVD  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
Select “SETUP” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
e.g. January 1st  
SETUP menu will appear.  
JAN/01  
When pressing L button at the  
current date, timer recording  
mode will change as follows.  
L
Setup  
Daily  
L
MON-SAT  
L
MON-FRI  
L
SAT  
L
Playback Setting  
FRI  
L
Note  
3
L
• If you have not set the  
clock yet:  
SUN  
L
Select “Recording” using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
A clock setting window will  
appear after step 4. Continue  
with the step 4 in “Auto  
Clock Setting” on page 22 or  
“Manual Clock Setting” on  
page 23 before making a  
timer programming.  
• Press { or B buttons to  
move the cursor to the left  
and the right in the timer  
programming menu.  
DEC/31  
Recording menu will appear.  
7
DVD  
Setup > Recording  
Enter the time to start and  
to end using K / L buttons,  
then press B button.  
DVD-RW Recording Format  
Auto Chapter  
VR mode  
10 minutes  
Timer Programming  
Dubbing Mode  
VCR DVD  
Setup > Recording > Timer Programming  
DVD  
Date  
Start  
End  
CH  
Speed  
VCR  
JAN/12 10 :00PM - - : - -AM CH8 DVD  
- - -  
- - -  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Timer recording (cont’d)  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
8
10  
12  
Select the channel number to  
record using K / L buttons,  
then press B button.  
Select a recording speed  
using K / L buttons.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
Setup > Recording > Timer Programming  
DVD  
Date  
Start  
End  
CH  
Speed  
VCR  
Setup > Recording > Timer Programming  
SPACE  
0
JAN/12 10:00PM 10:30PM CH8 DVD XP  
- - -  
DVD  
Date  
Start  
End  
CH  
Speed  
VCR  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
JAN/12 10:00PM 10:30PM CH8 DVD  
- - -  
Refer to “Recording speed” on page  
27 for DVD or page 94 forVCR.  
To record from external input, L1  
or L2.  
PLAY  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
11  
8
9
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Press ENTER button when all  
information required is  
entered.  
Select a recording media  
using K / L buttons, then  
press B button.  
9
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
10  
11  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Your program setting will be  
stored.  
• To set another program, repeat  
steps 5 to 11.  
Setup > Recording > Timer Programming  
DVD  
Date  
Start  
End  
CH  
Speed  
VCR  
JAN/12 10:00PM 10:30PM CH8 DVD  
- - -  
Note  
• After step 12, the unit will be  
turned on automatically 2  
minutes (ForVCR recording,  
10 seconds) in advance of the  
recording time to start and  
waits to start.Then the  
• To record on to a videotape, select  
VCR.  
• To record on to a disc, select DVD.  
• To exit, press SETUP button.  
12  
Press POWER button to turn off.  
indicator will appear on the  
front display.  
recording will start at the  
recording time you set.  
Checking, canceling, or correcting the timer programming  
information  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
1
6
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
1
4
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
Press POWER button so that  
To clear the timer programming,  
select your desired program  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
indicator disappears from  
the front display.  
using K / L buttons, then press  
CLEAR/C.RESET button.  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
2
To correct the timer program-  
ming, select your desired pro-  
PressTIMER PROG. button.  
PLAY  
Timer Programming list will appear.  
STOP  
2
5
4
gram using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Next, correct the timer programming  
using K/L/{/B buttons.  
Finally, press ENTER button again.  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
Setup > Recording > Timer Programming  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
DVD  
Date  
Start  
End  
CH  
Speed  
VCR  
JAN/12 10:00PM 10:30PM CH8 DVD XP  
- - -  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
4
3
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Check the information on the  
list you will need.  
5
Note  
PressTIMER PROG. button to exit.  
• Press TIMER PROG. button to  
check the timer programming  
in process.  
When the timer recording is  
in process, that program will  
be red highlighted. In this case,  
you cannot select any other  
program.  
6
Press POWER button to return  
to the timer standby mode.  
To stop the timer recording in process  
Press STOP C button to stop the disc recording or STOP/EJECT  
A to stop the videotape recording on the front panel of the main  
unit. STOP C button on the remote control is not effective.  
C
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Timer recording (cont’d)  
Hints for timer recording  
•
If there is a power failure or this unit has been unplugged for more than 30 seconds, the clock setting and all timer settings will be lost.  
• If a disc is not on the tray, the DVD indicator on the front panel flashes and timer recording cannot be performed.  
Please insert a recordable disc.  
• If a videotape with a record tab is not in the cassette compartment, theVCR indicator on the front panel flashes and  
timer recording cannot be performed. Please insert a recordable videotape.  
• When all the timer recording is completed, the  
indicator flashes.To play or eject the recorded disc (or the video-  
tape), press POWER button first and then press PLAY B or OPEN/CLOSE A (or STOP/EJECT  
C
A) button.  
• The timer recording is not performed in DVD andVCR at the same time. If you set two programmings with the same  
channel and time both in DVD andVCR, the programming that has priority will be recorded.  
•
During timer recording or timer standby (  
available.To make these operations available, cancel the timer recording or timer standby first (  
• To cancel the timer standby mode, press POWER button.  
indicator is on the front display), any operations on the unit will not be  
indicator disappears).  
• When the Start and the End time are the same, the length of the recording will be set for 24 hours.When the disc  
reaches at the end during the recording, the unit turns itself off.  
•
•
When the programmed Start and End time are earlier than the current time, the recording will be set on the same date in the next year.  
If your programmed Start time for DVD recording is within 2 minutes from the current time, the power will turn on for recording  
standby right after you turn the power off. For a videotape recording, the power will turn on shortly before the Start time.  
• If a videotape ends during timer recording, the unit will stop, eject the videotape, and turn itself off.  
• When two or more programs are overlapped,“Overlap” will appear in the display.  
•
If the Start time is earlier and the End time is later than the current time, the recording will start right after you turn the power off.  
The priority of overlapped settings  
This unit records the programs according to priority if the timer programmings are overlapped.The timer programming  
set previously has priority.  
A timer recording of lower priority will be canceled, start from the middle or stop on the way.  
Check the overlapped timer programmings and change the priority if necessary.  
A programming set previously has priority  
When the starting time is the same:  
A program set previously (PROG. 1) has priority.  
When some programming have been  
made at the end time of the  
programming currently being recorded:  
A program set previously (PROG. 2) has priority.  
ex.1  
ex. 2  
PROG. 1  
PROG. 1  
PROG. 2  
PROG. 3  
PROG. 2  
Actual  
recording  
The first 30 seconds (at the longest) will be cut off  
Actual  
recording  
The first 30 seconds (at the longest) will be cut off  
PROG. 1  
PROG. 2  
PROG. 1  
PROG. 2  
When the recording time is partially overlapped:  
PROG. 1 will start after PROG. 2 is complete to be recorded.  
However, PROG. 1 will be recorded if you turn the power off for timer standby within 2 minutes  
to the Start time for PROG. 1.  
PROG. 1  
Note  
PROG. 2  
• When the recording time of  
two programs are overlapped,  
or the End time of a program  
and the Start time of another  
is the same, the first 30 sec-  
onds (at the longest) of the  
subsequent program will be  
cut off.  
Actual  
recording  
The first 30 seconds (at the longest) will be cut off  
PROG. 2  
PROG. 1  
When the recording time is entirely overlapped:  
However, if you turn the power off for timer standby within 2 minutes to  
the Start time for PROG. 1, PROG. 1 will be recorded first, and the  
recording of PROG. 2 will start after the recording of PROG. 1 is completed.  
PROG. 1  
PROG. 2  
Actual  
recording  
PROG. 2  
When the End time of the programming currently being recorded and the Start time  
of the subsequent program are same:  
If PROG. 1 is a DVD recording program, the beginning of the PROG. 2 may be cut off.  
The amount of time cut off differs depending on the recorded media.  
For example, if both PROG. 1 and PROG. 2 are DVD recordings, the first 30 seconds (at the longest) will be cut off PROG.  
PROG. 1  
PROG. 2  
Actual  
recording  
PROG. 1  
PROG. 2  
The first 30 seconds (at the longest) will be cut off.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Settings for an external source  
Connection to an external source  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
VCR  
Connect the external source properly to the unit by using input jacks either LINE2 (Front) or LINE1 (Rear).  
When you record on a videotape, use either the DVD/VCRVIDEO IN jack (Rear) orVIDEO IN jack (Front).  
S-VIDEO input is useful only in DVD mode.  
When connecting an external equipment of monaural output to this unit, use AUDIO L jack of LINE 1  
(Rear) or LINE 2 (Front).  
Use commercially available S-Video orVideo cable and an Audio cable for this connection.  
OUTPUT  
VIDEO AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
Another source  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO AUDIO  
(VCR camcorder etc.)  
L
R
L
R
or  
or  
S-Video  
cable  
Video  
cable  
Audio  
cable  
S-Video  
cable  
Video  
cable  
Audio  
cable  
DVD  
S-VIDEO  
DVD/VCR  
AUDIO IN  
L
S-INPUT  
VIDEO L(MONO)  
-
AUDIO  
-
R
R
IN  
VIDEO IN  
or  
To LINE 2 IN  
To LINE 1 IN  
OPEN/CLOSE  
DVD  
AUDIO S-VIDEO  
DD/VCR  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
DAL  
AUDIO UT OUT  
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA  
IN  
Y
L
L
STOP/EJECT  
PLAY  
STOP  
PLAY  
POWER  
L
PB/CB  
R
R
COAXIAL  
REW F.FWD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
IN  
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT  
OUT  
R
P
R/CR  
OUT  
Front of this unit  
Rear of this unit  
1. Press SETUP button to display SETUP/DISC menu.  
2. Select “SETUP” using { / B buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
1. Press SETUP button to display SETUP/DISC menu.  
2. Select “SETUP” using { / B buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
3. Select “SelectVideo” using K / L / { /  
B
3. Select “SelectVideo” using K / L / { /  
B
buttons, then press ENTER button.  
buttons, then press ENTER button.  
DVD  
DVD  
Setup > Select Video  
Setup > Select Video  
L1 (Rear)  
L2 (Front)  
L1 (Rear)  
L2 (Front)  
Video In  
Video In  
Video In  
Video In  
4. Select “L2 (Front)” using K / L buttons,  
4. Select “L1 (Rear)” using K / L buttons, then  
then press ENTER button.  
press ENTER button.  
DVD  
DVD  
Setup > Select Video  
Setup > Select Video  
L1 (Rear)  
L2 (Front)  
L1 (Rear)  
L2 (Front)  
Video In  
S-Video In  
Video In  
S-Video In  
5. Select the input jack type to connect using  
K / L buttons, then press ENTER button.  
If you want to use S-VIDEO INPUT, select“S-Video In”.  
If you want to useVIDEO INPUT (Composite),  
select “Video In”.  
5. Select the input jack type to connect using  
K / L buttons, then press ENTER button.  
If you want to use S-VIDEO INPUT, select“S-Video In”.  
If you want to useVIDEO INPUT (Composite),  
select “Video In”.  
DVD  
DVD  
Setup > Select Video  
Setup > Select Video  
L1 (Rear)  
L2 (Front)  
L1 (Rear)  
L2 (Front)  
Video In  
S-Video In  
Video In  
S-Video In  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Settings for an external source (cont’d)  
Recording from an external source  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
VCR  
Before recording from an external source, see the instructions for the connection on page 37.  
1. Turn theTV and the unit on, and be sure to select the input  
of theTV to which the unit is connected.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
5
1
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
2
3
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
DVD  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
2. When you want to record to the disc: Press:  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
Press OPEN/CLOSE A button to open the disc tray, then  
place the disc to record properly.  
SPACE  
0
4
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
This operation may take a while to be recognized.  
3. Press OPEN/CLOSE A button to close the disc tray.  
PLAY  
STOP  
VCR  
8
When you want to record to a videotape: Press:  
Insert the videotape with a record tab into the cassette  
compartment.  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
6
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
4. Select the input of the unit which the external equipment is  
connected. (L2 or L1)  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
•To use the input jacks on the back of this unit, select “L1” position by  
pressing [0],[0],[1] on the remote control or the CH K / L buttons.  
•To use the input jacks on the front of this unit, select “L2” position  
by pressing [0],[0],[2] on the remote control or the CH K / L but-  
tons.  
5. Select a recording speed using REC MODE/REC SPEED but-  
ton. Refer to “Recording speed” on page 27 for DVD or page 94 for  
VCR.  
XP  
SP  
LP  
EP  
SP  
SLP  
SEP  
SLP  
DVD mode  
VCR mode  
6. Press REC/OTR button on the unit to start recording.  
7. Press PLAY button on the external source to record from.  
8. For disc:  
Press STOP C button on the unit to stop recording.  
This operation may take a while to be completed.  
For videotape:  
Press STOP/EJECT  
ing.  
C
A button on the unit to stop record-  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Dubbing Mode  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
2
VCR  
Select “SETUP” using { /  
B
REC MODE  
You can copy a DVD disc to a  
videotape or copy a videotape to a  
DVD disc.This function will be pos-  
sible only if the DVD disc or the  
videotape is not copy protected.  
Before starting this function, pre-  
pare for the recording on the DVD-  
RW/R disc or the videotape. Refer  
to pages 31-32, 94.  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
SETUP menu will appear.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
Setup  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
PLAY  
STOP  
Playback Setting  
1
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
Make sure:  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
• Insert a recordable disc and a  
videotape with a record tab.  
Note for recording to a  
videotape:  
• The videotape's record tab is  
intact.  
2
3
4
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
3
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
Select “Recording” using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Recording menu will appear.  
• The remaining time of the video-  
tape is long enough.  
Note for recording to a disc:  
• Make sure that the disc is  
recordable. Refer to pages 27  
and 28.  
DVD  
Setup > Recording  
DVD-RW Recording Format  
Auto Chapter  
VR mode  
10 minutes  
Timer Programming  
Dubbing Mode  
VCR DVD  
1
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
4
Select “Dubbing Mode” using  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
Note  
Setup > Recording  
VCR DVD  
For VCR to DVD duplication:  
DVD-RW Recording Format  
Auto Chapter  
Video mode  
OFF  
• After startingVCR to DVD  
duplication, the picture may be  
distorted because of the auto  
tracking function.  
Timer Programming  
Dubbing Mode  
Setup Menu  
VCR DVD  
This is not a malfunction. Be  
advised to playback the video-  
tape until the picture is stabi-  
lized, then set the starting  
point which you wish to start  
recording, and startVCR to  
DVD duplication.  
Instructions continue on page 40.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Dubbing Mode (cont’d)  
VCR to DVD  
DVD toVCR  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
5-a  
5-b  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
Select “VCR ⇒ DVD” using  
K
Select “VCR ⇐ DVD” using  
K
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
7-a  
7-b  
/
L buttons, then press  
/
L buttons, then press  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
ENTER button.  
ENTER button.  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Setup > Recording  
VCR DVD  
Setup > Recording  
VCR DVD  
DVD-RW Recording Format  
Auto Chapter  
DVD-RW Recording Format  
Auto Chapter  
Video mode  
OFF  
Video mode  
OFF  
9-a  
9-b  
PLAY  
Timer Programming  
Dubbing Mode  
Timer Programming  
Dubbing Mode  
STOP  
VCRDVD
VCR DVD  
VCRDVD
VCR DVD  
6-a  
6-b  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
5-a  
5-b  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
6-a  
6-b  
Press SETUP button to exit  
SETUP menu.  
Press SETUP button to exit  
SETUP menu.  
Make sure to select a recording  
speed using REC MODE/REC  
SPEED button.  
VCR  
Press:  
Make sure to select a recording  
speed using REC MODE/REC  
SPEED button.  
VCR  
Press:  
7-a  
9-a  
DVD  
OPEN/CLOSE  
Press:  
7-a  
STOP/EJECT  
PLAY  
STOP  
PLAY  
POWER  
REW F.FWD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
Press PLAY B button on the  
unit, and then press PAUSE  
button at the point you wish  
to start recording.  
7-b  
Press PLAY B button on the  
unit, and then press PAUSE  
button at the point you wish  
to start recording.  
8-a 7-b  
8-b  
9-b  
• Since it takes about a few sec-  
onds before the actual dubbing  
begins, please allow extra 5 sec-  
onds when selecting the starting  
point.  
Note  
• When you turn off the unit  
after setting the Dubbing  
8-b  
Press DUBBING button on  
the front of the unit.  
Mode to  
, the  
8-a  
setting will be set to  
automatically.  
• Dubbing Mode is available  
DVD toVCR duplication will start.  
Press DUBBING button on  
the front of the unit.  
9-b  
VCR to DVD duplication will start.  
only if the videotape or disc is  
not copy protected.  
• You cannot change the output  
mode duringVCR to DVD or  
DVD toVCR duplication.  
Press STOP/EJECT  
C
A but-  
ton on the unit or STOP  
button on the remote control  
to stop the recording.  
C
9-a  
Press STOP C button on the  
unit or STOP C button on  
the remote control to stop  
the recording.  
For VCR to DVD duplication:  
• The playback sound mode is  
followed by the setting of  
VCR playback sound mode on  
page 96. Set the playback  
sound mode to which you  
wish to record to the DVD.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Finalizing the discs  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Finalizing will start.  
DVD-R  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
You will need to finalize the discs  
recorded inVideo mode to play in  
other DVD players.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
1
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
58%  
PLAY  
Finalizing  
STOP  
4
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
To cancel finalizing...  
• To cancel finalizing at step 4,  
press STOP C button, select  
“YES”, then press ENTER  
button. Finalizing is cancelled  
and the DVD recorder will  
be in stop mode.  
1
2
3
4
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Setup Menu  
• If  
appear when pressing  
STOP button, you cannot  
cancel finalizing because the  
finalizing has been in certain  
progress.  
2
Select “DISC” using { /  
B
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
• When selecting “No”, press  
ENTER or RETURN button,  
finalizing will be continued.  
• You cannot cancel finalizing  
the DVD-R disc when it has  
been started.  
Disc  
Edit  
Format  
Finalize  
Note  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
• Finalizing discs inVideo mode  
automatically creates title  
menus.  
• Once you have finalized a disc  
recorded inVideo mode, you  
cannot edit or record any-  
thing else on that disc.  
5
Finalizing is complete.  
*VR mode only  
3
Select “Finalize” using K /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
L
Discs recorded inVR mode  
can still be recorded and edit-  
ed on this unit even after  
being finalized.  
• When you insert a DVD-RW  
disc finalized with this unit,  
“Undo Finalize” will appear  
instead of “Finalize”.  
Option window will appear.  
100%  
Finalizing  
Disc  
Edit  
Format  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
Yes  
No  
Disc  
Edit  
Format  
Undo Finalize  
*VR mode only  
To release the finalizing for  
the disc, select “Undo  
Finalize” at step 3.  
4
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Setting a disc to protect  
VR  
DVD-RW  
3
To prevent accidental recording,  
editing, or erasing the titles, you  
can protect them from DISC  
menu.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select “Disc Protect OFF ➔  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
ON” using K / L buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
1
Disc  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
Edit  
Format  
Finalize  
PLAY  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
STOP  
Yes  
No  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
1
2
3
4
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
4
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Setup Menu  
A disc will be protected.  
2
Select “DISC” using { /  
B
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
58%  
Writing to Disc  
Disc  
Edit  
Format  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Finalize  
Note  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
• The Disc Protect setting is  
available only when a disc  
withVR mode is inserted.  
To cancel the disc protect:  
• When you insert a disc pro-  
tected with this unit,“Disc  
Protect ON → OFF” will  
appear instead of “OFF →  
ON”.  
Disc  
Edit  
Format  
Finalize  
Disc Protect ON  
Yes  
OFF  
No  
To release the protect for the  
disc, select “Disc Protect ON  
→ OFF” at step 3, then select  
“Yes”.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing discs  
Information on DVD play  
Before you attempt to play DVD discs, read the following information.  
Playable discs  
Color systems  
This unit is compatible to play the following discs.  
To play a DVD, make sure that it meets the requirements  
for Region Codes and Color Systems as described below.  
Discs that have the following logos will play on the unit.  
Other Disc types are not guaranteed to play.  
DVDs are recorded in different color systems  
throughout the world.The most common color sys-  
tem is NTSC (which is used primarily in the United  
States and Canada).  
This unit uses NTSC, so DVDs you play must be  
recorded in the NTSC system.You cannot play  
DVDs recorded in other color systems.  
Disc  
Logo  
DVDVIDEO  
Region codes  
This unit has been designed to play DVD discs with  
Region One (1). DVDs must be labeled for ALL  
regions or for Region 1 in order to play on this unit.  
You cannot play DVDs that are labeled for other  
regions. Look for the symbols below on your DVDs.  
If these region symbols do not appear on your  
DVD, you cannot play that DVD in this unit.  
DVD-RW (VIDEO/VR mode)  
DVD-R (VIDEO mode)  
DVD+RW (VIDEO mode)  
DVD+R (VIDEO mode)  
CD-DA (AUDIO CD)  
The number inside the globe refers to region of the  
world.  
A DVD labeled for a specific region can only play on  
the unit with the same region code.  
CD-RW (CD-DA FORMAT, MP3 files)  
CD-R (CD-DA FORMAT, MP3 files)  
Hint for DVD playback  
The contents of DVD disc are generally divided into  
titles.Titles may be further subdivided into chapters.  
Start Rec.  
Stop/Start  
Stop Rec.  
Note:  
The following discs can be played on this unit but  
their performance is not guaranteed :  
• DVD-RWVer 1.2 / 2-4x CPRM compatible  
• DVD-R GeneralVer 2.0 / 8x  
Title 1  
Title 2  
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 1 Chapter 2  
Guide to displays  
DVD  
1. Indicates a disc type and a  
5. Each icon means:  
First:  
format mode.  
: Search  
Press DISPLAY button to call up  
the display menu.This menu will  
give you the information on the  
playing disc. Some operations are  
available while disc is playing.  
:Audio  
2. Indicates a recording speed  
and possible recording time.  
: Subtitle  
:Angle (exceptVR mode)  
: Repeat  
3. Indicates a current channel  
number and an audio status of  
the program.  
4
1
: Marker  
DVD-RW  
1
1
00:00:00  
Video mode  
: Noise Reduction  
: Zoom  
4. Indicates a title number, chap-  
ter number, and the time  
elapsed of disc play.  
SP 1:25 Rem.  
2
3
CH 1  
STEREO  
5
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing discs  
Basic playback  
Playback  
Video  
DVD-RW  
Video  
VR  
DVD-RW  
5
DVD-R  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
PressTOP MENU button to  
display the title menu.  
You can change “Original” or  
“Playlist” of VR mode using  
MENU / LIST button.  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
DVD+R  
2
4
7
1
7
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
1
SPACE  
0
Press POWER button, then  
press DVD button.  
When you are playing a DVD, turn  
the TV on and be sure to select the  
input to which the unit is connected.  
Video mode:  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Title List  
PLAY  
1
2  
3
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
JAN/1 12:00AM  
4
JAN/1 1:00AM  
5
JAN/1 2:00AM  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
2
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
6
5
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
Press OPEN/CLOSE A but-  
ton to open the disc tray.  
The disc tray will open.  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
VR mode:  
Original  
3
1
2  
3
Place the disc onto the disc  
tray with its label facing up  
and make sure to align the  
disc to the disc tray guide.  
JAN/1 12:00AM  
4
JAN/1 1:00AM  
5
JAN/1 2:00AM  
JAN/1 3:00AM  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
MENU / LIST button  
Playlist  
1
2  
3
disc  
Note  
tray  
guide  
JAN/1 12:00AM  
4
JAN/1 1:00AM  
5
JAN/1 2:00AM  
• For DVD-R (Video mode)  
and DVD-RW (Video mode)  
discs which are already final-  
ized, a title list will be dis-  
played instead of thumbnails.  
This operation may take a  
while to be recognized.  
JAN/1 3:00AM  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
4
Title Menu  
6
Press OPEN/CLOSE A but-  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
JAN/1 12:24AM CH96 XP  
ton to close the disc tray.  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Playback will start.  
7
• You can resume play from  
where you stopped playing  
the disc. (Resume play)  
Refer to page 48 for details  
about resume play.  
• Some discs may start playing  
automatically.  
Press STOP C button to stop  
playback.  
To eject the disc, press  
OPEN/CLOSE A button to open  
the disc tray, then remove the disc  
before turning off the unit.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing discs  
Basic playback (cont’d)  
DVD-V  
CD  
MP3  
4
REC MODE  
Press PLAY B button to start  
playing.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
1
2
1
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
Press POWER button, then  
press DVD button.  
Playback will start.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
When you are playing a DVD or  
an audio CD, turn the TV on and  
be sure to select the input to  
which the unit is connected.  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
If you are playing a DVD-Video  
disc, a menu may appear.  
Refer to pages 46-47 for details  
about a disc menu.  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
PLAY  
4
5
STOP  
2
5
Press OPEN/CLOSE A but-  
ton to open the disc tray.  
The disc tray will open.  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
Press STOP C button to stop  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
playing.  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
3
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Place the disc onto the disc  
tray with its label facing up  
and make sure to align the  
disc to the disc tray guide.  
Note  
• Some discs may start playing  
automatically.  
For MP3 playback  
• Press PLAY B, ENTER or B but-  
ton to move to the lower hierar-  
chies.  
• Press s button or RETURN  
button to go to the previous  
hierarchy.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
1
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
In stop mode, pressTOP MENU  
button to call up the MP3 menu.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
List of MP3 Files  
DISC NAME  
SPACE  
0
• Press STOP C button to return  
to the first item.  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
FOLDER NAME 1  
FOLDER NAME 2  
FOLDER NAME 3  
FOLDER NAME 4  
FOLDER NAME 5  
FOLDER NAME 6  
PLAY  
Hints for MP3 files:  
• Folders are known as Groups,  
files are known as Tracks.  
STOP  
2
2
2
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
2
FILE NAME 1  
FILE NAME 2  
1/2  
•
•
Folders are accompanied by  
MP3 files are accompanied by  
Reproduction will start from the  
selected track and go to the  
next one in turn.  
icon.  
icon.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
• To exit the menu, press TOP  
MENU button again.  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
1
CM SKIP  
MODE  
•
•
The system can recognize up to 255  
groups (or folders) and up to 255 tracks.  
The name of the group and track  
can be displayed in up to 32 char-  
acters. Unrecognizable characters  
will be replaced with asterisks.  
2
K L  
buttons to select a  
Press  
/
Note  
desired folder (group) or track,  
then press ENTER button.  
• The audio source of MP3 files  
cannot be recorded as digital  
sound by an MD or DAT deck.  
• Files whole extension other  
than “.mp3 (MP3)” will not be  
listed in the MP3 menu.  
• Some unplayable folders or  
tracks may be listed in the  
MP3 menu due to the  
When selecting track:  
Playback will start.  
• If there are no files in the folder,  
“No Files” will be displayed.  
When selecting the folder:  
The files in the folder will appear.  
Press K or L button to select the  
track or folder you want, then  
press ENTER button.  
This unit recommends the files  
recorded under the following cir-  
cumstances:  
•
•
recording status.  
Sampling frequency: 44.1kHz or 48kHz.  
Constant bit rate: 112kbps - 320kbps.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing discs  
Basic playback (cont’d)  
Playing discs using the disc menu  
DVD-V  
2
A DVD disc contains a disc menu  
that describes the contents or  
allows you to customize the play-  
back. For example, the menu may  
offer choices for subtitle lan-  
guages, special features, or chapter  
selection.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select an item using K / L /  
{ / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button to confirm.  
Continue this step to set up all  
the features you want or to start  
playing the disc from the menu.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
2
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Sometimes these are displayed  
automatically when you start play-  
back, otherwise only appear when  
you press MENU / LIST button.  
MENU / LIST button:  
PLAY  
Displays a DVD disc menu which  
varies with the disc and may be  
the same as the ‘Title menu.’  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
2
3
DVD  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
First:  
2
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
K / L / { / B buttons:  
Moves the cursor around screen.  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
1
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Press MENU / LIST button.  
The DVD main menu will appear.  
Enter button:  
Selects the currently highlighted  
menu option.  
If the feature is not available,  
may appear on the TV screen.  
Number buttons:  
Selects a numbered menu option  
(some discs only). Press ENTER  
button after.  
3
Press MENU / LIST button to  
exit the menu.  
Note  
• Menus vary among discs.  
Refer to the information  
accompanying the disc for  
details.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing discs  
Basic playback (cont’d)  
Playing discs using the title menu  
DVD-V  
2
Some DVDs have a title menu,  
which lists the titles available on  
them. It helps you to start play-  
back at a specific title.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select a title to play using the  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
K / L / { / B buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Playback will begin at the title you  
selected.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
2
DVD  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
First:  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
1
TOP MENU button:  
Displays the ‘Title menu’ of a  
DVD disc which varies with the  
disc.  
PressTOP MENU button.  
PLAY  
The title menu will appear.  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
If the feature is not available,  
may appear on the TV screen.  
2
K / L / { / B buttons:  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
1
2
3
Moves the cursor around screen.  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Enter button:  
Selects the current highlighted  
menu option.  
Number buttons:  
Selects a numbered menu option  
(some discs only). Press ENTER  
button after.  
3
PressTOP MENU button to  
exit the title menu.  
Note  
• The TOP MENU button will  
not always be active with all  
DVDs.  
• Menus vary among discs.  
Refer to the information  
accompanying the disc for  
details.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing discs  
Special playback  
Resume play  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-V  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
2
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Video  
DVD+RW  
DVD-R  
DVD+R  
Press PLAY B button.  
In a few seconds, playback will  
resume from the point at which it  
stopped last.You can resume play  
at the same point even if you turn  
off the unit.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
MP3  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
You can resume play from where  
you stopped playing the disc last.  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
1
PLAY  
2
1
2
To cancel the resume play and  
start playing the disc from the  
beginning, press STOP C button  
the second time while the play-  
back is stopped.  
During playback, press STOP  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
C button.  
The resume message will appear.  
Screen:  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Note  
• For MP3 files, playback will  
resume from the beginning of  
the track at which playback  
was stopped.  
Resume ON  
Fast forward / Fast reverse  
Video  
DVD+RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-V  
CD  
DVD-R  
DVD-R  
DVD+R  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
MP3  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
1
SPACE  
0
During playback, press D or E button.  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Every time you press D or E button, approximate speed will be  
changed as follows. For DVD discs, sound will be output during fast for-  
ward in x2 only if you set “Fast Forward with Audio” to “ON” for the  
“Playback” setting in the SETUP menu.  
Fast forward or fast reverse playback across titles (for DVD discs) or  
tracks (for MP3) is not possible.  
PLAY  
1
1
STOP  
1
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
REC MONITOR  
Note  
g
g
g
g
g
g
Normal  
speed  
• Forward/reverse speed will be  
indicated with icons as fol-  
lows.  
x40  
x20  
x5  
x2  
x20  
x40  
h
h
h
h
h
h
playback  
Forward (Approx. Speed)  
x2:  
x20:  
x40:  
For Audio CDs, approximate speed is fixed at x8 with sound.  
For MP3 files, approximate speed is fixed at x16.  
To return to the normal playback, press PLAY B button.  
Reverse (Approx. Speed)  
x5:  
x20:  
x40:  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing discs  
Special playback (cont’d)  
SkippingTV commercials during play  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
e.g. Press CM SKIP button once  
DVD-R  
SPACE  
0
SLOW  
Video  
DVD+RW  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
DVD+R  
You can skip TV commercials by  
pressing CM SKIP button, so that  
you can enjoy the recorded pro-  
grams without interrupting.  
PLAY  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
CM Skip  
30 sec.  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
1
CM SKIP  
MODE  
(forwarding 30 seconds.)  
During playback, press CM  
SKIP button.  
1
Normal playback will start at 30  
seconds ahead from the point you  
press CM SKIP button.  
Every time you press CM SKIP  
button, the searching point will be  
extended by 30 seconds ahead.  
You can press up to 6 times (180  
seconds).  
B
Playback will restart automatically.  
Pause  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-V  
2
Video  
DVD+RW  
REC MODE  
DVD-R  
DVD+R  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Press PLAY B button to  
.@/:  
1
resume play.  
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
MP3  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
1
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
During playback, press  
SPACE  
0
PAUSE F button.  
Playback will pause and sound will  
be muted.  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
1
PLAY  
2
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing discs  
Special playback (cont’d)  
Step by step playback  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-V  
SPACE  
0
SLOW  
2
Video  
DVD+RW  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
DVD+R  
DVD-R  
DVD-R  
1
3
Press SKIP G button  
repeatedly.  
PLAY  
1
STOP  
The playback will advance one  
frame (or step) at a time when  
you press the SKIP G button  
During playback, press  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
PAUSE F button.  
Playback will pause and sound will  
be muted.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
with the sound muted.  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
2
CM SKIP  
MODE  
To play step by step back-  
ward:  
Press SKIP H button repeatedly.  
Every time you press the button,  
the playback will go backward by  
one frame.  
3
Press PLAY B button to  
resume play.  
Slow forward / Slow reverse play  
Video  
DVD+RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-V  
DVD-R  
DVD-R  
DVD+R  
REC MODE  
1
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
During playback, press PAUSE k button, then press D or  
E
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
button.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
Every time you press D or E button, approximate speed will be  
changed as follows. (The sound will remain muted.)  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
g
h
g
h
g
h
g
h
g
h
g
h
1
1
1
Pause  
x1/4  
x1/8  
x1/16  
x1/16  
x1/8  
x1/2  
PLAY  
STOP  
1
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
RETURN  
To return to the normal playback, press PLAY B button.  
ENTER  
REC MONITOR  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
Note  
• Forward/reverse speed will be  
indicated with icons as fol-  
lows.  
Forward (Approx. Speed)  
x1/16:  
x1/8:  
x1/2:  
Reverse (Approx. Speed)  
x1/16:  
x1/8:  
x1/4:  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing discs  
Special playback (cont’d)  
Zoom  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
DVD-V  
2
3
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
2
Video  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
DVD-R  
DVD-R  
Select a desired zoom factor  
to zoom using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
The zoom area will be displayed.  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
1
CM SKIP  
MODE  
1
During playback, press  
ZOOM button.  
Zoom menu will appear.  
Screen:  
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
x1.2  
x1.5  
x2.0  
Note  
• When selecting a smaller factor  
than the current one, the zoom  
area will not be displayed.  
• To remove the zoom menu, press  
ZOOM button again at step 1.  
• To cancel the zoom function,  
select x1.0 using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
3
B
Select a desired zoom position  
There are four options  
using K / L / { / B buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
The zoom play will start.  
(x1.0,x1.2,x1.5 and x2.0), these  
are displayed excluding the cur-  
rent zoom rate.  
Marker Setup  
Video  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Screen for DVD:  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
DVD-V  
DVD-RW  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
Video  
DVD+RW  
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
DVD-R  
DVD+R  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
1
2
3
4
5
6
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
This feature allows you to assign  
a specific point on a disc to be  
called back later.  
1
PLAY  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
Screen for CD:  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
During playback, press DIS-  
PLAY button.  
2
3
4
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
Audio CD  
1
01:23:45  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
1
2
3
4
5
6
The display menu will appear.  
Screen:  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
Note  
• To clear a marker, select the  
marker number to be cleared,  
then press CLEAR/C.RESET  
button.  
• All markers will be erased  
when you operate these opera-  
tions listed below.  
– Opening the disc tray.  
– Turning off the power.  
– Recording to a recordable  
disc.  
3
Select a desired marker num-  
ber using { / B buttons.  
When it reaches the desired  
point, press ENTER button.  
2
Select  
icon using { /  
B
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
Marker setup menu will appear.  
4
To return to the marker later,  
select the desired marker  
number using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
–
Changing the mode between  
Original and Playlist.(VR mode)  
•You can mark up to 6 points.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing discs  
Search  
Title/Chapter search  
Video  
DVD+RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-V  
DVD-R  
DVD-R  
DVD+R  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
Using SKIP H / G buttons  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
1
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
During playback, press SKIP G button to skip the current  
title or chapter and move to the next.  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
The title or chapter will move forward one at a time.  
PLAY  
To go back to the previous title or chapter, press SKIP H button.The  
STOP  
title or chapter will move backward one title at a time.  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
1
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Using DISPLAY button  
1
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
During playback, press DISPLAY button.  
The display menu will appear.  
Screen:  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
2
1
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
PLAY  
STOP  
2
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Select  
ton.  
icon using { / B buttons, then press ENTER but-  
2
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
‘T’ for title will be highlighted.  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Title:  
Enter a desired title number to search using K / L buttons or  
number buttons, then press ENTER button.  
Title search will start.  
Chapter:  
To move to ‘C’ for chapter, press B button.  
Enter a desired chapter number to search using K / L buttons  
or number buttons, then press ENTER button.  
Chapter search will start.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing discs  
Search (cont’d)  
Track search  
CD  
MP3  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
Using SKIP H / G buttons  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
1
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
During playback, press SKIP G button to skip the current  
track and move to the next.  
1
CM SKIP  
MODE  
The track will move forward one at a time.  
To go back to the previous track, press SKIP H button.The track will  
move backward one at a time.  
Using DISPLAY button  
SPACE  
0
SLOW  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
1
1
During playback, press DISPLAY button.  
The display menu will appear.  
Screen:  
PLAY  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
2
3
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Audio CD  
1
01:23:45  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
2
Select  
icon using { /  
B
buttons, then press ENTER button.  
‘T’ for track will be highlighted.  
3
Enter a desired track number to search using K / L buttons or  
number buttons, then press ENTER button.  
Track search will start.  
Time search  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-V  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
2
Video  
DVD+RW  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
DVD-R  
DVD+R  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
Select  
icon using { /  
B
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
‘T’ for title or track will be high-  
lighted.  
To move to the clock icon, press  
B button.  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
1
1
During playback, press DIS-  
PLAY button.  
PLAY  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
The display menu will appear.  
Screen for DVD:  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
2
3
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
3
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
Enter a desired time to  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
search using K / L buttons or  
number buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Note  
Screen for CD:  
• Time search function is avail-  
able only in the same track or  
title.  
Time search will start.  
Audio CD  
1
01:23:45  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing discs  
Repeat/Random/Program play  
Repeat play  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
DVD-V  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
3
Video  
DVD+RW  
Select a desired option to  
repeat using K / L buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DVD-R  
DVD+R  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
MP3  
SPACE  
0
The selected repeat play will start.  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
1
Title:  
During playback, press DIS-  
PLAY button.  
1
The current title will be played  
repeatedly. (DVD only)  
PLAY  
The display menu will appear.  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
Chapter:  
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
The current chapter will be played  
repeatedly. (DVD only)  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
2
3
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
All:  
The current disc will be played  
repeatedly (CD, MP3 and DVD-  
RW (VR mode) only).  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
2
Select  
icon using  
{
/
B
but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
Repeat menu will appear.  
Screen:  
A-B:  
The A-B point will be played  
repeatedly.  
DVD-Video  
Audio CD  
MP3  
1
1
01:23:45  
When pressing ENTER button  
while A-B is highlighted, the start-  
ing point (A) will be decided.  
OFF  
Title  
Chapter  
A-B  
Note  
• The A-B Repeat playback can  
only be set within the current  
title (for DVDs), or current  
track (for Audio CDs).  
Press ENTER button again to  
select the ending point (B).  
2
00:00:30  
OFF  
Track  
All  
Track:  
•
To cancel the repeat playback,  
select OFF at step 2.The  
A-B  
The current track will be played  
repeatedly. (CD, MP3 only)  
repeat setting will also be can-  
celled when you stop playback.  
• You cannot select “Group”  
during the random playback  
of MP3 files.  
114  
00:00:30  
Group:  
OFF  
Track  
All  
The current group will be played  
repeatedly. (MP3 only)  
Group  
Random play  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
CD  
MP3  
SPACE  
0
SLOW  
With this function, you can play a  
disc randomly instead of playing it  
in the original order.  
2
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Select “CD” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
PLAY  
DVD  
First:  
STOP  
CD Playback Mode menu will  
appear.  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
1
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/CD menu.  
SETUP/CD menu will appear.  
Screen:  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
2
3
CD Playback Mode  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
Random Play  
Program Play  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Note  
3
• To cancel random playback,  
Select “Random Play” using  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
press STOP C button twice  
during random playback.  
• “Playmode OFF” appears on  
the screen.  
Random playback will start.  
Setup Menu  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing discs  
Repeat/Random/Program play (cont’d)  
Program play  
CD  
3
You can program the disc to play  
in your desired order.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select “Program Play” using  
DVD  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Program play list will appear.  
First:  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
4
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
1
SPACE  
0
CD Playback Mode > Program Play  
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/CD menu.  
SETUP/CD menu will appear.  
Screen:  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
PLAY  
5
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Total  
00:00:00  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
2
3
4
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
4
Select a desired track using  
L buttons, then press  
K
Setup Menu  
/
ENTER button or B button.  
A cursor will move to the next.  
2
CD Playback Mode > Program Play  
Select “CD” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
07 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
CD Playback Mode menu will  
appear.  
Total  
00:04:30  
CD Playback Mode  
Random Play  
Program Play  
5
Press PLAY B button to start  
program playback.  
Program playback will start.  
Note  
• To erase tracks you selected,  
press CLEAR/C.RESET but-  
ton.  
• You can make program set-  
tings up to 50.  
• To cancel program playback,  
press STOP C button twice  
during program playback.  
• “Playmode OFF” appears on  
the screen.  
• You may also select a desired  
track using Number buttons  
at step 4.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing discs  
Selecting the format of audio and video  
You can select the format of audio and video as you prefer depending  
on the contents of the disc you are playing.  
Switching audio soundtrack  
VR  
DVD-V  
DVD-RW  
<DVD-RWVR mode>  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
When playing a DVD-Video disc  
recorded with two or more  
soundtracks (these are often in  
different languages), you can  
switch between them anytime  
during playback.  
DVD-RW  
VR Original  
1
1
00:00:00  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
1 Dolby Digital Dual L/R  
2 Dolby Digital 2ch ----  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
On DVD-RW discs recorded in  
VR mode, you can switch to main  
(L), sub audio (R) or a mix of  
both (L/R).  
1
PLAY  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
3
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Select a desired audio sound-  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
1
2
3
4
track using K / L buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
Audio soundtrack will switch.  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
During playback, press DIS-  
PLAY button.  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
The display menu will appear.  
Screen:  
<DVD-RWVR mode>  
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
DVD-RW  
VR Original  
1
1
00:00:00  
1 Dolby Digital Dual  
2 Dolby Digital 2ch  
L/R  
L
R
2
4
Select  
icon using { /  
B
Select a desired audio chan-  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
Audio menu will appear.  
<DVD-Video>  
nel using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Audio channel will switch.  
Note  
•
•
•
Some discs will only allow  
you to change the sound-  
track from the disc’s menu.  
Press TOP MENU button or  
MENU / LIST button to dis-  
play the disc’s menu.  
On DVD-RW discs recorded  
inVR mode that may have  
both a main and a sub audio  
channel, you can switch to  
main (L), sub audio (R), or a  
mix of both (L/R).  
This unit CANNOT record  
in both stereo and SAP  
(Secondary Audio Program)  
at the same time.  
DVD-Video  
1
1
00:00:00  
1 Dolby Digital 5.1ch English  
2 Dolby Digital 2ch Japanese  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing discs  
Selecting the format of audio and video (cont’d)  
CD  
MP3  
2
When playing Audio CDs or MP3  
files you can switch between  
stereo, just the left channel or  
just the right channel.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select  
icon using { /  
B
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
Audio menu will appear.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
1
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
During playback, press DIS-  
PLAY button.  
1
3
PLAY  
Select a desired audio chan-  
The display menu will appear.  
Screen:  
STOP  
nel using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Audio channel will switch.  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Audio CD  
1
00:00:00  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
2
3
Audio CD  
1
00:00:00  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
L/R  
L
CM SKIP  
MODE  
R
Switching subtitles  
VR  
DVD-V  
DVD-RW  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
2
Many DVDVideo discs have subti-  
tles in one or more languages.  
The case usually tells you which  
subtitle languages are available.  
You can switch subtitle languages  
anytime during playback.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
Select  
icon using { /  
B
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
Subtitle menu will appear.  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
DVD-Video  
1
1
00:00:00  
1
1
OFF  
1English  
PLAY  
During playback, press DIS-  
PLAY button.  
STOP  
2Japanese  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
The display menu will appear.  
Screen:  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
2
3
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
3
Note  
Select a desired subtitle lan-  
• Some discs will only allow  
you to change the subtitle  
from the disc’s menu. Press  
TOP MENU button or MENU  
/ LIST button to display the  
disc’s menu.  
guage using K / L buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
Subtitle will be displayed in the  
selected language.  
When selecting “OFF,” subtitle will  
disappear.  
• If a 4-digit language code  
appears in the subtitle menu  
at step 2, please refer to the  
Language code on page 101.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing discs  
Selecting the format of audio and video (cont’d)  
Switching camera angles  
DVD-V  
2
Some DVDVideo discs feature  
scenes shot from two or more  
angles, check the case for details:  
it should be marked with an angle  
icon if it contains multi-angle  
scenes.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select  
icon using { /  
B
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
Angle will switch each time you  
press ENTER button.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
1
1
During playback, press DIS-  
PLAY button.  
PLAY  
STOP  
The display menu will appear.  
Screen:  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
2
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Angle icon appears when a switch-  
ing camera angle is available.  
Reducing block noise  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-V  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
Video  
DVD+RW  
DVD-Video  
1
1
00:00:00  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
DVD+R  
DVD-R  
DVD-R  
OFF  
Type 1  
Type 2  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
1
SPACE  
0
During playback, press DIS-  
PLAY button.  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
1
The display menu will appear.  
Screen:  
PLAY  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
3
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Select a desired option using  
2
3
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Your setting will be activated.  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
This function reduces noise in the  
playback picture.When playing  
back discs recorded in long time  
mode such as SLP or SEP mode,  
select "Type 1" or "Type 2".  
("Type 2" is more effective.)  
When playing back discs with a  
few noises such as DVD-Video  
discs, select "OFF".  
2
Select  
icon using { /  
B
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
Noise Reduction menu will appear  
.
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Information on disc editing  
Guide to a title list  
Editing discs inVideo mode  
Title list allows you to check the titles recorded on  
the disc easily.You can choose a title to play from this  
screen and easily edit the titles as you prefer.  
You can edit discs inVideo mode for the following items.  
Be sure that once you edit titles, they will not remain as  
recorded originally.  
• Deleting titles (Refer to page 61)  
• Putting names on titles (Refer to pages 62-63)  
• Setting or clearing chapter markers (Refer to page 64)  
Disc > Edit > Original  
1
2  
3
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
6
Note  
•
Once a disc is finalized, editing the disc or  
recording to the disc will not be available.  
(Except DVD-RW discs inVR mode.)  
A playlist is not available with the DVD-R discs  
and DVD-RW discs inVideo mode.  
JAN/1 6:00AM  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
1
2
7
•
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
ON  
Protect OFF  
JAN/1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
8 3  
6
5
4
1. Titles recorded on the disc can be selected to  
edit by pressing ENTER button with the cursor  
on the title.  
2. Protect icon, which appears when the title has  
been protected.  
3. The selected title thumbnails from the title list.  
• The selected title will be played back automat-  
ically.  
• The sound will be muted.  
4. The menus in here for editing titles as you pre-  
fer.The available menus depends on the disc  
type and the format type.  
5. The details of the title, which can be changed to  
the title name you will edit.  
6. Time status bar of the title.  
7. The arrow icon, which means the title list  
includes a next or a previous page. Press B or  
{ button by following direction of the icon.  
8. Playback status of the current disc.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Information on disc editing (cont’d)  
Editing discs inVR mode  
For discs inVR mode, you can edit from “Original” menu or “Playlist” menu, which is created from the  
original.  
Editing original titles  
The following items can be used to edit the original  
titles.  
• Deleting titles (Refer to page 65)  
• Deleting parts of titles (Refer to pages 66-67)  
• Putting names on titles (Refer to pages 67-68)  
• Setting or clearing chapter markers (Refer to  
pages 69-70)  
Editing playlists  
You can create a playlist from original titles, so that  
you can edit as you prefer without losing original  
titles.  
The following items you can edit with a playlist.  
• Deleting titles (Refer to page 74)  
• Deleting parts of titles (Refer to pages 75-76)  
• Putting names on titles (Refer to pages 76-77)  
• Setting or clearing chapter markers (Refer to  
pages 78-79)  
• Setting pictures for thumbnails (Refer to pages  
70-71)  
• Setting titles to protect (Refer to page 72)  
• Releasing titles from protecting (Refer to page 73)  
• Setting pictures for thumbnails (Refer to pages  
79-80)  
• Adding titles to a playlist (Refer to page 81)  
• Deleting a playlist (Refer to page 82)  
Note  
•
Original titles once edited will not remain as recorded originally.When you want to leave the original as  
it is, edit the playlist as you prefer.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVideo mode  
Deleting titles  
Video  
DVD-RW  
3
You can delete titles which you  
do not need anymore.  
Be sure to know that the titles  
once deleted cannot be brought  
back to the disc.  
When the last title in the title list  
inVideo mode is deleted, the disc  
space to record will be increased.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
Edit menu will appear.  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
Disc > Edit  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Title Delete  
1
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
DVD  
PLAY  
First:  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
6
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
1
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
0:01:25  
1
2
3
4
5
Press SETUP button. Select  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
4
Select “Title Delete” using  
K
Disc  
/
L buttons, then press  
Edit  
ENTER button.  
Format  
Finalize  
Option window will appear.  
Disc > Edit  
Title Delete  
1
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Yes  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
No  
2
0:01:25  
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
5
Titlelist will appear.  
Screen:  
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Disc > Edit  
1
2  
3
Title will be deleted.  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
Disc > Edit  
Title Delete  
1
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
Yes  
No  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
6
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVideo mode (cont’d)  
Putting names on titles  
Video  
DVD-RW  
4
You can put title names on the  
titles and change the names from  
this menu.  
The names you put on the titles  
will be displayed on a titlelist.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select “EditTitle Name”  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
A window for entering a title  
name will appear.  
5
1
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
DVD  
First:  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Disc > Edit > Edit Title Name  
A B C  
1
1
PLAY  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
Press SETUP button. Select  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
1
2
3
4
5
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
Disc  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Edit  
Format  
Finalize  
5
To enter a title name, follow  
the steps of "Guide to edit  
title name" on this page.  
character set  
Disc > Edit > Edit Title Name  
A B C  
1
2
[
]
Guide to edit title name  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
[
[
]
Step1 : Select a desired character set using  
K
L
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
Titlelist will appear.  
/
buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
Screen:  
]
Step2 : Press Number buttons following by the list  
below.  
Select  
ABC  
abc  
123  
@ ! ?  
Disc > Edit  
Press  
area for entering title names  
<space>  
<space>  
0
<space>  
! ” # $ %  
0
1
12  
3
& ’ ( )  
When you finish entering a title  
name, press ENTER button.  
*
+ , - . / : ;  
< = > ?  
@ [ ] ^  
_ { | }  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
*1  
*1  
1
1
2
3
4
ABC  
DEF  
abc  
def  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
GHI  
ghi  
JKL  
jkl  
5
6
MNO  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
mno  
pqrs  
tuv  
7
8
3
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
wxyz  
9
1
*1 Press  
to the " @ " mode automatically.  
button, character set will be changed  
!?  
Edit menu will appear.  
• To delete letters, press CLEAR/C.RESET button  
repeatedly. Holding CLEAR/C.RESET button  
to delete all letters.  
• To go on to the next entering area for letters,  
Disc > Edit  
B
press  
button.  
• You can enter up to 30 letters.  
Title Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
1
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVideo mode (cont’d)  
6
REC MODE  
POWER  
OPEN/CLOSE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
The name you entered will be  
activated for the title.  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Disc > Edit > Edit Title Name  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
1
PLAY  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
7
Yes  
No  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
abc  
6
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
Writing to Disc  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
7
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVideo mode (cont’d)  
Setting or clearing chapter markers  
Video  
DVD-RW  
4
You can put chapter markers in each  
title. Once a chapter is marked, you can  
use it for the chapter search feature.  
You can set chapter markers at a speci-  
fied time you selected for titles with  
more than 5 minutes.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select “Chapter Mark” using  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
DVD  
Disc > Edit  
First:  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Title D
OFF  
1
Edit Tit
5 minutes  
Chapte
10 minutes  
PLAY  
15 minutes  
30 minutes  
60 minutes  
1
STOP  
Press SETUP button. Select  
1
7
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
1
2
3
4
5
6
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
0:01:25  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Disc  
5
Edit  
Select a desired time using  
K
Format  
Finalize  
/
L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
Disc > Edit  
Title D
OFF  
5 minutes  
Chapte
10 minutes  
1
Edit Tit
2
15 minutes  
30 minutes  
60 minutes  
Select “Edit” using  
K
/
L
but-  
Yes  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
No  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
Titlelist will appear.  
Screen:  
0:01:25  
Disc > Edit  
6
1
12  
3
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
A chapter marker will be added.  
If you select “OFF” at step 5, all  
the chapter markers will be  
erased.  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
3
Note  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
7
• You cannot select a time for  
putting markers beyond a  
length of a title.  
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
Edit menu will appear.  
• The length of chapters may  
be slightly longer or shorter  
than the one specified at the  
step 5.  
Disc > Edit  
Title Delete  
1
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
• A chapter marker may be  
delayed according to the  
recording content.  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Original)  
Deleting titles  
VR  
DVD-RW  
4
When a title is deleted from an  
original list inVR mode, the disc  
space to record will be increased.  
Be advised that the titles once  
deleted cannot be brought back  
to the disc.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
Original menu will appear.  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
DVD  
Disc > Edit > Original  
First:  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect OFF ON  
PLAY  
1
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
Press SETUP button. Select  
1
7
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
1
2
3
4
5
6
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
0:01:25  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
5
Disc  
Edit  
Select “Title Delete” using  
K
Format  
/
L buttons, then press  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture  
Protect OFF ON  
2
Yes  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
No  
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
0:01:25  
Disc > Edit  
6
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Title will be deleted.  
Original  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture  
Protect OFF ON  
3
Yes  
No  
Select “Original” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
Original list will appear.  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
1
2  
3
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
7
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
65  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Original) (cont’d)  
Deleting parts of titles  
VR  
DVD-RW  
4
You can delete part of a title, the  
disc space to record will be  
increased.  
Be advised that the parts once  
deleted cannot be brought back  
to the disc.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
Original menu will appear.  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
Disc > Edit > Original  
DVD  
First:  
Title Delete  
1
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect OFF ON  
PLAY  
6
1
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
Press SETUP button. Select  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
1
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0:01:25  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
5
Select “Scene Delete” using  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Disc  
Edit  
Format  
Finalize  
Option window will appear.  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Start  
Edit Titl
End  
Chapte
Preview  
Index P
Delete  
Protect
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
2
0:00:55  
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
6
Use SKIP  
PLAY , and PAUSE  
to decide the start point, then  
press ENTER.Then use SKIP  
, PLAY , and  
buttons again to move  
H
/
G
,
E
,
D
,
B
F
buttons  
Disc > Edit  
H
/
G
,
E
,
D
B
PAUSE  
F
to the end point, and press  
ENTER. Press ENTER again to  
start the preview.  
Original  
A cursor will move to “Preview.”  
You can check the preview by  
pressing ENTER.  
3
The bar at the bottom of the screen indi-  
cates the total and the elapsed time of the  
title, and the area selected for deletion will  
be indicated in red during the preview.  
Select “Original” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
Original list will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
<Preview>  
Start point End point  
1
2  
3
Before  
editing  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
Edited  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Original) (cont’d)  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
I
f the thumbnail of the title is in the  
7
deleted area, the thumbnail will be  
set to the first picture of the title.  
Playback will start from the newly  
created chapter marker.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
Select “Delete” using K /  
L
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
Option window will appear.  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Deete  
Start  
PLAY  
Title Delete  
Scene Delete  
1
Edit Titl
End  
Chapte
Start  
STOP  
Preview  
Edit Titl
End  
Index P
Delete  
Chapte
Protect
Preview  
Delete  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
9
Index P
Protect
Yes  
No  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Yes  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
No  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
7
8
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
0:01:25  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
8
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Selected area will be deleted, and a  
chapter marker is created automati-  
cally where deletion is performed.  
Note  
9
• You cannot select “Scene  
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
Delete” when the number of  
chapter markers in the original  
or playlist is more than 900.  
Putting names on titles  
VR  
DVD-RW  
2
You can put title names on the  
titles and change the names from  
this menu.  
The names you put on the titles  
will be displayed on a titlelist.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
DVD  
First:  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Disc > Edit  
1
PLAY  
Press SETUP button. Select  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
1
2
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
Original  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
Disc  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Edit  
Format  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
Instructions continue on page 68.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Original) (cont’d)  
3
6
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
To enter a title name, follow  
the steps of "Guide to edit  
title name" on this page.  
character set  
Select “Original” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
6
8
Original list will appear.  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
Disc > Edit > Original  
Disc > Edit > Original > Edit Title Name  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
1
1
12  
3
PLAY  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
0:01:25  
3
4
5
6
7
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
area for entering title names  
When you finish entering a title  
name, press ENTER button.  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
4
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
7
Original menu will appear.  
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
The name you entered will be  
activated for the title.  
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect OFF ON  
[
]
Guide to edit title name  
[
[
]
Step1 : Select a desired character set using  
K
L
/
buttons, then press  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
Disc > Edit > Original > Edit Title Name  
ENTER button.  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
1
0:01:25  
]
Step2 : Press Number buttons following by the list  
below.  
Select  
ABC  
abc  
123  
@ ! ?  
Yes  
No  
Press  
abc  
5
<space>  
<space>  
0
<space>  
! ” # $ %  
0
Writing to Disc  
Select “EditTitle Name”  
& ’ ( )  
*
+ , - . / : ;  
< = > ?  
@ [ ] ^  
_ { | }  
*1  
*1  
1
1
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
A window for entering a title  
name will appear.  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
2
3
4
ABC  
DEF  
abc  
def  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GHI  
ghi  
JKL  
jkl  
5
6
8
Disc > Edit > Original > Edit Title Name  
MNO  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
mno  
pqrs  
tuv  
A B C  
1
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
7
8
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
wxyz  
9
1
*1 Press  
button, character set will be changed  
to the " @ " mode automatically.  
!?  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
• To delete letters, press CLEAR/C.RESET button  
repeatedly. Holding CLEAR/C.RESET button  
to delete all letters.  
• To go on to the next entering area for letters,  
B
press  
button.  
• You can enter up to 30 letters.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Original) (cont’d)  
Setting or clearing chapter markers  
VR  
DVD-RW  
4
You can put chapter markers in each title.  
REC MODE  
Select a desired title using K /  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
Once a chapter is marked, you can use it  
for the chapter search feature.  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Original menu will appear.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
You can put a chapter marker anywhere  
you want.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
When the number of chapter markers in  
the original list comes to 999 in total, you  
cannot add any more chapter markers.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
SPACE  
0
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect OFF ON  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
DVD  
First:  
PLAY  
6
STOP  
1
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
6
Press SETUP button. Select  
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
0:01:25  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
1
2
3
4
5
6
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
5
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Select “Chapter Mark” using  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Disc  
Edit  
Format  
Finalize  
Option window will appear.  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Add  
Chapte
Chapter 1/1  
Delete  
Index P
Protect OFF ON  
2
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Select “Edit” using  
K
/
L
but-  
0:01:25  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
6
Disc > Edit  
Use SKIP  
H
/
G,  
E
,
D,  
PLAY B, and PAUSE F but-  
tons to decide the point at  
which you will create a new  
chapter marker. Or, use SKIP  
H
/
G to decide a chapter  
marker that you will delete.  
Select “Add” or “Delete”  
accordingly using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Option window will appear.  
<Add>:  
Original  
3
Select “Original” using  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
Original list will appear.  
{
/
B
but-  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
1
2  
3
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Add  
Chapte
Chapter 1/1  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
Delete  
Index P
Protect OFF ON  
F
Yes  
No  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
0:01:25  
Instructions continue on page 70.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Original) (cont’d)  
<Delete>:  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
Add  
The chapter marker which you  
selected will be deleted.  
<Delete>:  
Chapter 2/2  
Chapte
Delete  
Index P
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
Protect OFF ON  
F
Yes  
No  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
SPACE  
0
0:01:25  
Disc > Edit > Original  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Title Delete  
1
•You cannot delete the first  
chapter marker of each title.  
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Add  
PLAY  
Chapter 2/2  
Chapte
Delete  
Index P
STOP  
Protect OFF ON  
Yes  
No  
8
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
7
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
When you select “Add” at step 6, a  
new chapter marker will be created  
at the point you have decided.  
When you select “Delete” at step 6,  
the chapter marker you have selected  
will be deleted.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
7
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
8
<Add>:  
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Add  
Chapte
Chapter 1/1  
Delete  
Index P
Protect OFF ON  
Yes  
No  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
Setting pictures for thumbnails  
VR  
DVD-RW  
REC MODE  
2
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
You can set a picture to each title for  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
a thumbnail. It helps you to remem-  
ber the contents of the title you are  
playing.The beginning picture has  
been selected as the default.  
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
SPACE  
0
DVD  
First:  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Disc > Edit  
PLAY  
1
STOP  
Press SETUP button. Select  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
1
2
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
Original  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Disc  
Edit  
Format  
Note  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
• If a selected picture for a  
thumbnail is deleted by delet-  
ing a part of a title, a default  
picture will be selected.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Original) (cont’d)  
3
6
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select “Original” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
A picture for thumbnail will be  
set.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
Original list will appear.  
SPACE  
0
Disc > Edit > Original  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
1
12  
3
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
PLAY  
5
Scene Delete  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
STOP  
Index Picture Set  
Protect OFF ON  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
7
5
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Yes  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
No  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
3
4
5
6
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
4
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
7
Original menu will appear.  
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect OFF ON  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
5
Select “Index Picture Set”  
using K / L buttons. Use SKIP  
H
/
G
,
E, D, PLAY B,  
and PAUSE F buttons to  
decide the picture you want  
to select as a thumbnail.Then  
press ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect OFF ON  
F
Yes  
No  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Original) (cont’d)  
Setting titles to protect  
VR  
DVD-RW  
4
To prevent accidental editing or  
erasing the titles, you can protect  
them from the original menu.  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
DVD  
First:  
Original menu will appear.  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
Disc > Edit > Original  
1
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Title Delete  
1
Press SETUP button. Select  
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect OFF ON  
PLAY  
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
STOP  
1
7
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
0:01:25  
1
2
3
4
5
6
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
Disc  
Edit  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
Format  
5
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Finalize  
Select “Protect OFF ➔ ON”  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
Option window will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
2
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect OFF ON  
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Yes  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
No  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
0:01:25  
Disc > Edit  
6
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect OFF ON  
Original  
Yes  
No  
3
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
Select “Original” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Original list will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
7
1
2  
3
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
Note  
• The protected title will be  
marked with a key icon in the  
original list.  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
To protect a whole disc:  
Select “Disc Protect” from Disc  
menu, then select “Yes”.  
Refer to “Setting a disc to pro-  
tect” on page 42.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Original) (cont’d)  
Releasing titles from protecting  
VR  
DVD-RW  
4
You are allowed to release the  
titles protecting feature once pro-  
tected.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
DVD  
First:  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
Original menu will appear.  
SPACE  
0
1
Disc Edit > Original  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Title Delete  
2
Press SETUP button. Select  
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect ON OFF  
PLAY  
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
7
JAN/ 1 2:00AM CH12 XP  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
0:01:25  
1
2
3
4
5
6
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
Disc  
Edit  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
Format  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
5
Select “Protect ON ➔ OFF”  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
2
Disc Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
2
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect ON OFF  
B
Yes  
JAN/ 1 2:00AM CH12 XP  
No  
0:01:25  
Disc > Edit  
6
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
The key icon will disappear from  
the title in the original list.  
Original  
Disc Edit > Original  
3
Title Delete  
2
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect ON OFF  
Select “Original” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
Yes  
No  
JAN/ 1 2:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
Original list will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
1
2  
3
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
7
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Playlist)  
Deleting titles  
VR  
DVD-RW  
4
InVR mode, even when a title is  
deleted from a Playlist, the original  
title will remain in an Original list.  
The disc space to record will not  
be increased.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
Playlist menu will appear.  
DVD  
SPACE  
0
First:  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
1
PLAY  
STOP  
Press SETUP button. Select  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
7
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
0:01:25  
1
2
3
4
5
6
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
Disc  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
5
Edit  
Format  
Select “Title Delete” using  
K
Finalize  
/
L buttons, then press  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
2
Yes  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
No  
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
0:01:25  
Disc > Edit  
6
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
Title will be deleted.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Original  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
3
Yes  
No  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
Select “PlayList” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Playlist will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
1
12  
3
7
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
Add New  
Title  
Delete  
Playlist  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Playlist) (cont’d)  
Deleting parts of titles  
VR  
DVD-RW  
4
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
You can delete a specific part of a title.  
Even when a title is deleted from the  
playlist, the original title will remain.  
The disc space to record will not be  
increased.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
Playlist menu will appear.  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
DVD  
First:  
Title Delete  
1
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
6
PLAY  
1
STOP  
Press SETUP button. Select  
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
6
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
1
2
3
4
5
6
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
5
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
Disc  
Select “Scene Delete” using  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Edit  
Format  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
Option window will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Dl
Start  
Edit Titl
End  
Chapte
Preview  
Index P
Delete  
2
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
0:00:55  
6
Use SKIP  
PLAY , and PAUSE  
decide the start point, then press  
ENTER.Then use SKIP  
, PLAY , and PAUSE  
H
/
G
,
E
,
D
,
Disc > Edit  
B
F
buttons to  
H
/
G,  
E
,
D
B
F
buttons again to move to the end  
point, and press ENTER. Press  
ENTER again to start the preview.  
A cursor will move to “Preview.”  
You can check the preview by pressing ENTER.  
The bar at the bottom of the screen indi-  
cates the total and the elapsed time of the  
title, and the area selected for deletion will  
be indicated in red during the preview.  
Original  
3
Select “PlayList” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
Playlist will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
<Preview>  
Start point End point  
1
2  
3
Before  
editing  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
Add New  
Title  
Delete  
Playlist  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
Edited  
Instructions continue on page 76.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Playlist) (cont’d)  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
Part of a title will be deleted.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
7
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Title Delete  
1
Select “Delete” using K /  
L
SPACE  
0
Scene Delete  
Start  
Edit Titl
End  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Chapte
Preview  
Index P
Delete  
Yes  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
No  
PLAY  
Option window will appear.  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
9
Title Delete  
1
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Scene Delete  
Start  
Edit Titl
End  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
7
8
Chapte
Preview  
Index P
Delete  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
Yes  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
No  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
0:01:25  
9
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
Note  
8
• You cannot select “Scene  
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Delete” when the number of  
chapter markers in the original  
or playlist is more than 900.  
Putting names on titles  
VR  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
DVD-RW  
You can put title names on the  
titles and change the names from  
this menu.  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
Disc > Edit  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
The names you put on the titles  
will be displayed on a titlelist.  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
DVD  
SPACE  
0
First:  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Original  
1
PLAY  
STOP  
Press SETUP button. Select  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
3
1
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Select “PlayList” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
1
2
3
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
Disc  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Playlist will appear.  
Edit  
Format  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
1
2  
3
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
Add New  
Title  
Delete  
Playlist  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
2
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Playlist) (cont’d)  
4
7
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select a desired title using K / Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
The name you entered will be  
activated for the title.  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Playlist menu will appear.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Title Delete  
1
Disc > Edit > Playlist > Edit Title Name  
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
A B C  
1
PLAY  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
8
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Yes  
No  
0:01:25  
4
5
6
7
abc  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
Writing to Disc  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
5
Select “EditTitle Name”  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
A window for entering a title  
name will appear.  
8
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP to exit  
DISC menu.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist > Edit Title Name  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
1
[
]
Guide to edit title name  
[
[
]
Step1 : Select a desired character set using  
K
L
/
buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
]
Step2 : Press Number buttons following by the list  
0:01:25  
below.  
Select  
ABC  
abc  
123  
@ ! ?  
Press  
<space>  
<space>  
0
<space>  
! ” # $ %  
0
6
& ’ ( )  
*
+ , - . / : ;  
< = > ?  
@ [ ] ^  
_ { | }  
*1  
*1  
1
1
To enter a title name, follow  
the steps of "Guide to edit  
title name" on this page.  
character set  
2
3
4
ABC  
DEF  
abc  
def  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GHI  
ghi  
JKL  
jkl  
5
6
MNO  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
mno  
pqrs  
tuv  
Disc > Edit > Playlist > Edit Title Name  
7
8
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
1
wxyz  
9
1
*1 Press  
button, character set will be changed  
!?  
to the " @ " mode automatically.  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
• To delete letters, press CLEAR/C.RESET button  
repeatedly. Holding CLEAR/C.RESET button  
to delete all letters.  
0:01:25  
• To go on to the next entering area for letters,  
area for entering title names  
B
press  
button.  
• You can enter up to 30 letters.  
When you finish entering a title  
name, press ENTER button.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Playlist) (cont’d)  
Setting or clearing chapter markers  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
You can put chapter markers in  
each title. Once a chapter is  
marked, you can use it for the  
chapter search feature.  
You can put a chapter marker  
anywhere you want.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
1
2  
3
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
Add New  
Title  
Delete  
Playlist  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
When the number of chapter  
markers in the playlist comes to  
999 in total, you cannot add any  
more chapter markers.  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
4
PLAY  
6
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
DVD  
1
6
First:  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Playlist menu will appear.  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Title Delete  
1
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Press SETUP button. Select  
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
Disc  
Edit  
Format  
5
Finalize  
Select “Chapter Mark” using K /  
L
Disc Protect OFF ON  
buttons, then press ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
2
Add  
Chapter 1/1  
Chapte
Delete  
Index P
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
6
Use SKIP  
H
/
G
,
E
F
,
D,  
PLAY , and PAUSE  
B
buttons to  
decide the point at which you will  
create a new chapter marker. Or,  
use SKIP  
H
/
G
to decide a  
chapter marker that you will  
delete. Select “Add” or “Delete”  
Disc Setting  
accordingly using  
K
/
L
buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
3
<Add>:  
Select “PlayList” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Playlist will appear.  
Add  
Chapter 1/1  
Chapte
Delete  
Index P
F
Yes  
No  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Playlist) (cont’d)  
<Delete>:  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Title Delete  
1
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Add  
The chapter marker which you  
selected will be deleted.  
<Delete>:  
Chapter 2/2  
Chapte
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
Delete  
Index P
F
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
Yes  
No  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
0:01:25  
SPACE  
0
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Title Delete  
1
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
•You cannot delete the first  
chapter of each title.  
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Add  
Chapter 2/2  
Chapte
Delete  
Index P
PLAY  
STOP  
Yes No  
7
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
8
S
elect “Yes” using { / B but-  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
When you select “Add” at step 6, a  
new chapter marker will be created  
at the point you have decided.  
When you select “Delete” at step 6,  
the chapter marker you have selected  
will be deleted.  
7
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
8
<Add>:  
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Add  
Chapter 1/1  
Chapte
Delete  
Index P
Yes  
No  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
Setting pictures for thumbnails  
VR  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
DVD-RW  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
2
You can set a picture to each title for  
a thumbnail. It helps you to remember  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
the contents of the title you are play-  
ing.The beginning picture has been  
selected as the default.  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
DVD  
First:  
PLAY  
Disc > Edit  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
1
Press SETUP button. Select  
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
1
2
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
RETURN  
SKIP  
Original  
Note  
Disc  
• If a selected picture for a  
Edit  
Format  
thumbnail is deleted by delet-  
ing a part of a title, a default  
picture will be selected.  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
Instructions continue on page 80.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Playlist) (cont’d)  
3
6
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select “PlayList” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
A picture for thumbnail will be  
set.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
Playlist will appear.  
SPACE  
0
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
1
12  
3
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Title Delete  
1
PLAY  
5
Scene Delete  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
STOP  
Add New  
Title  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
7
5
Delete  
Playlist  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Yes  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
No  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
3
4
5
6
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
4
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
7
Playlist menu will appear.  
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
5
Select “Index Picture Set”  
using K / L buttons. Use SKIP  
H
/
G
,
E, D, PLAY B,  
and PAUSE F buttons to  
decide the picture you want  
to select as a thumbnail.Then  
press ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
F
Yes  
No  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Playlist) (cont’d)  
Adding titles to a Playlist  
VR  
DVD-RW  
4
You can add or delete a title in  
the playlist as you prefer.  
You can add titles to a Playlist up  
to 99.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select “Add NewTitle” using  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
K / L / { / B buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Original list will appear.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
DVD  
First:  
SPACE  
0
Disc > Edit > Playlist > Add New Title  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
1
1
12  
3
PLAY  
Press SETUP button. Select  
JAN/10 10:30AM  
JAN/12 5:00PM  
JAN/12 8:00PM  
STOP  
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
6
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
1
2
3
4
5
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
Disc  
Edit  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Format  
5
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist > Add New Title  
2
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
58%  
Writing to Disc  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Disc > Edit  
1
2  
3
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
6
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
JAN/12 8:00PM  
Original  
6
3
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
Select “PlayList” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
Playlist will appear.  
To delete a title from Playlist,  
refer to “Deleting titles” on page  
74.  
To delete a Playlist, refer to  
“Deleting a Playlist” on page 82.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
1
2  
3
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
Add New  
Title  
Delete  
Playlist  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Playlist) (cont’d)  
Deleting a Playlist  
VR  
DVD-RW  
4
A Playlist can be deleted if no  
longer needed.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select “Delete Playlist” using  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
DVD  
K / L / { / B buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
First:  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
1
SPACE  
0
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Press SETUP button. Select  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
1
12  
3
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
PLAY  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
STOP  
Add New  
Title  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
Delete  
Playlist  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Disc  
Yes  
No  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
1
2
3
4
5
Edit  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
Format  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
5
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
A Playlist will be erased.  
2
The unit will be in stop  
mode after exiting the  
DISC menu automatically.  
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
Disc > Edit  
Original  
3
Select “PlayList” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
Playlist will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
1
2  
3
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
Add New  
Title  
Delete  
Playlist  
Note  
• Deleting a Playlist will not  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
increase the available record-  
ing time on disc.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-R discs  
Deleting titles  
DVD-R  
Disc > Edit  
You can delete titles which you  
do not need, however the disc  
space to record on the disc will  
not be changed.  
Be aware to know that the titles  
once deleted cannot be brought  
back to the disc.  
Title Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
1
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
0:01:25  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
You cannot select “Chapter Mark”.  
DVD  
First:  
PLAY  
STOP  
4
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
6
1
Select “Title Delete” using  
K
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Press SETUP button. Select  
/
L buttons, then press  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
1
2
3
4
5
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
ENTER button.  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
Option window will appear.  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Disc > Edit  
Title Delete  
1
Disc  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Edit  
Format  
Finalize  
Yes  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
No  
0:01:25  
5
2
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Title will be deleted.  
Titlelist will appear.  
Screen:  
Disc > Edit  
Title Delete  
1
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Disc > Edit  
1
2  
3
Yes  
No  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
3
6
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
Edit menu will appear.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing DVD-R discs (cont’d)  
Putting names on titles  
DVD-R  
4
You can put names on the titles  
and change the names from this  
menu.  
The names you put on the titles  
will be displayed on a titlelist.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Select “EditTitle Name”  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
5
A window for entering a title  
name will appear.  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
DVD  
SPACE  
0
First:  
Disc > Edit > Edit Title Name  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
1
1
PLAY  
STOP  
Press SETUP button. Select  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
7
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
0:01:25  
1
2
3
4
5
6
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
Disc  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
5
Edit  
To enter a title name, follow  
the steps of "Guide to edit  
title name" on this page.  
character set  
Format  
Finalize  
Disc > Edit > Edit Title Name  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
1
2
[
]
Guide to edit title name  
Select “Edit” using K /  
L
but-  
[
[
]
Step1 : Select a desired character set using  
K
L
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
/
tons, then press ENTER button.  
Titlelist will appear.  
Screen:  
buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
0:01:25  
area for entering title names  
When you finish entering a title  
name, press ENTER button.  
]
Step2 : Press Number buttons following by the list  
below.  
Select  
Disc > Edit  
ABC  
abc  
123  
@ ! ?  
Press  
1
2  
3
<space>  
<space>  
0
<space>  
! ” # $ %  
& ’ ( )  
+ , - . / : ;  
< = > ?  
@ [ ] ^  
_ { | }  
0
6
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
*
*1  
*1  
1
1
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
2
3
4
ABC  
DEF  
abc  
def  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GHI  
ghi  
Disc > Edit > Edit Title Name  
JKL  
jkl  
5
6
3
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
1
MNO  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
mno  
pqrs  
tuv  
7
8
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
wxyz  
9
Yes  
No  
1
*1 Press  
to the " @ " mode automatically.  
button, character set will be changed  
abc  
!?  
Edit menu will appear.  
Writing to Disc  
• To delete letters, press CLEAR/C.RESET button  
repeatedly. Holding CLEAR/C.RESET button  
to delete all letters.  
Disc > Edit  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
• To go on to the next entering area for letters,  
Title Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
1
B
press  
button.  
• You can enter up to 30 letters.  
7
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
0:01:25  
You cannot select “Chapter Mark”.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the SETUP menu  
Tour of the SETUP menu  
The following table is the contents which you can set and the default settings.  
Refer to the following table for useful operation.  
SETUP menu  
Items (highlight is the default)  
Contents  
1.Language setting  
English  
French  
Spanish  
Disc Menu Language  
Set the language for disc menu.  
Pages 86-87  
Original  
English  
French  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Set the language for audio.  
Set the language for subtitle.  
OFF  
English  
French  
100%  
OSD Background  
Transparency  
Set the background transparency of OSD  
screen.  
2.Display setting  
Pages 88-89  
35%  
25%  
OSD Background  
Color  
1
2
3
Set the OSD screen color.  
1 (Green), 2 (Blue), 3 (Red)  
OSD Language  
English  
Français  
Español  
Set the language for OSD  
(On Screen Display).  
Screen Saver  
OFF  
5 minutes  
10minutes  
Set the time to work the screen saver on  
the screen.  
Dolby Digital  
PCM  
Set the type of sound signal which outputs  
from the digital audio output jack.  
Digital Out  
3.Audio setting  
Pages 90-91  
Stream  
PCM  
Set whether the sound recorded in 96kHz  
will be down sampled in 48kHz.  
Auto  
48kHz  
96kHz  
DTS  
Set whether DTS signal will be output or  
not.  
ON  
OFF  
Compressing the range of sound volume.  
Dynamic Range  
Control  
ON  
OFF  
Outputting the sound during play in fast  
forward.  
Fast Forward with  
Audio  
ON  
OFF  
4.Parental setting  
Pages 92-93  
ALL  
level 8 to 1  
Set the parental level of your DVD discs.  
Parental Lock  
Enter the current  
four-digit password  
Set and change the password.  
(Change password)  
Note  
• If you change the setting in SETUP  
menu, the information of contents  
stays on even when the power is  
switched off.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the SETUP menu  
Language setting  
Press STOP button if you are playing a disc.  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
1
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
4
Press SETUP button to display SETUP/DISC menu.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
PLAY  
STOP  
1
5
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Setup Menu  
2
3
4
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
2
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Select “SETUP” using { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
SETUP menu will appear.  
Setup  
Playback Setting  
3
Select “Playback” using K / L / { /  
B
buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
Parental Lock  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
OFF  
4
Select a desired item using K / L buttons, then press  
Note  
ENTER button.  
• Only the languages supported  
by the disc can be selected.  
• Audio Language setting may  
not be available to some  
discs.  
• You can change or switch off  
the subtitles on a DVD disc  
also from the disc menu if it  
is available.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the SETUP menu  
Language setting (cont’d)  
Disc Menu Language (Default : English)  
Set the language for Disc Menu.  
•
Select a setting using K /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
L
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
Parental Lock  
Parental Lock  
Your setting will be activated.  
English  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
French  
Spanish  
Other  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
Audio Language (Default : Original)  
Set the Audio language.  
•
Select a setting using K /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
L
DVD  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
Setup > Playback  
TV Aspect  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
Parental Lock  
Parental Lock  
Original  
Your setting will be activated.  
•
English  
Original  
OFF  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
When Original is selected, the  
audio language will be in the  
disc’s default language.  
French  
Spanish  
Other  
ON  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
OFF  
OFF  
Subtitle Language (Default : OFF)  
Set the subtitle language.  
•
Select a setting using K /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
L
DVD  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
Setup > Playback  
TV Aspect  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
Parental Lock  
Parental Lock  
OFF  
Your setting will be activated.  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
French  
Other  
Spanish  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
If “Other” is selected, press 4-digit code using number buttons.  
All  
English  
•
When you finish entering  
the code, press ENTER  
button. Refer to the lan-  
guage code table on page  
101.  
age  
French  
Spanish  
e
Other  
Code Input  
- - - -  
Control  
Audio  
ON  
OFF  
5
Press SETUP button to exit SETUP menu.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the SETUP menu  
Display setting  
Press STOP button if you are playing a disc.  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
1
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
Press SETUP button to display SETUP/DISC menu.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
PLAY  
STOP  
1
5
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
Setup Menu  
REC MONITOR  
2
3
4
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
2
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Select “SETUP” using { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
SETUP menu will appear.  
Setup  
Playback Setting  
3
Select “Display” using K / L / { /  
B
buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
DVD  
Setup > Display  
OSD Background Transparency  
OSD Background Color  
OSD Language  
35%  
1
English  
10 minutes  
Screen Saver  
4
Select a desired item using K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the SETUP menu  
Display setting (cont’d)  
OSD BackgroundTransparency (Default : 35%)  
Set the background transparency of OSD screen.  
You can choose one among 0% through 100%.  
•
Select a setting using K /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
L
DVD  
Setup > Display  
DVD  
Setup > Display  
OSD Background Transparency  
OSD Background Color  
OSD Language  
35%  
100%  
OSD Background Transparency  
OSD Background Color  
OSD Language  
85%  
70%  
1
Your setting will be activated.  
English  
10 minutes  
50%  
Screen Saver  
Screen Saver  
s  
35%  
25%  
10%  
0%  
OSD Background Color (Default : 1 Green)  
Set the OSD screen color.  
You can choose one among 1(Green), 2(Blue), and 3(Red).  
•
Select a setting using K /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
L
DVD  
Setup > Display  
DVD  
Setup > Display  
OSD Background Transparency  
OSD Background Color  
OSD Language  
35%  
OSD Background Transparency  
OSD Background Color  
OSD Language  
35%  
1  
2
1
Your setting will be activated.  
English  
10 minutes  
3
Screen Saver  
Screen Saver  
10 minutes  
OSD Language (Default : English)  
Set the language for OSD.  
•
Select a setting using K /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
L
Setup > Display  
VCR DVD  
Setup > Display  
VCR DVD  
OSD Background Transparency  
OSD Background Color  
OSD Language  
35%  
OSD Background Transparency  
OSD Background Color  
OSD Language  
35%  
1
1
Your setting will be activated.  
English  
English  
10 minutes  
Français  
Screen Saver  
Screen Saver  
es  
Español  
Screen Saver (Default : 10 minutes)  
Set the time to work the screen saver function on the screen.  
•
Select a setting using K /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
L
DVD  
Setup > Display  
DVD  
Setup > Display  
OSD Background Transparency  
OSD Background Color  
OSD Language  
35%  
OSD Background Transparency  
OSD Background Color  
OSD Language  
35%  
1
1
OFF  
Your setting will be activated.  
English  
10 minutes  
5 minutes  
Screen Saver  
Screen Saver  
10 minutes  
s  
15 minutes  
30 minutes  
5
Press SETUP button to exit SETUP menu.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the SETUP menu  
Audio setting  
Choose the appropriate Audio settings for your equipment.  
It will only affect DVD discs during playback.  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Press STOP button if you are playing a disc.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
1
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
Press SETUP button to display SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
PLAY  
STOP  
1
5
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
2
3
4
Setup Menu  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
2
Select “SETUP” using { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
SETUP menu will appear.  
Setup  
Playback Setting  
3
Select “Playback” using K / L / { /  
ENTER button.  
B
buttons, then press  
Option window will appear.  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
Parental Lock  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
Note  
OFF  
• Dynamic Range Control func-  
tion is available only on the  
discs which are recorded in  
the Dolby Digital format.  
4
Select a desired item using K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Digital Out  
Set the digital audio output.  
•
Select a setting using K /  
L
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
Setup > Playback  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
Option window will appear.  
Proceed to steps A,B or C.  
Parental Lock  
Parental Lock  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
PCM  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
Dolby Digital  
DTS  
OFF  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the SETUP menu  
Audio setting (cont’d)  
Settings for PCM (Default :Auto)  
A
•
Select a setting using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Original  
OFF  
Note  
When playing disc with copy-  
right protection  
Your setting will be activated.  
Auto  
: Select “Auto” usually.  
• If you select “Auto”, the sound  
will be down sampled at 48kHz.  
• If you select “96kHz”, no digital  
sound will be output. Select  
“Auto”, so that outputting  
48kHz digital sound.  
PCAuto  
48kHz : If your amplifier/decoder is NOT com-  
patible with 96kHz PCM, select “48kHz”.  
96kHz sound will be output in 48kHz.  
96kHz : If your amplifier/decoder is compatible  
with 96kHz PCM, select “96kHz”. 96kHz  
sound will be output.  
48kHz  
ntrol  
udio  
Dol
96kHz  
DTS  
Settings for Dolby Digital (Default : Stream)  
B
•
Select a setting using K / L buttons, then  
Note  
Original  
OFF  
press ENTER button.  
When playing a DVD-RW  
disc recorded inVR mode  
• If the audio source on a disc is  
Dolby Digital format, set “Dolby  
Digital” to “PCM” so that you  
can switch to main (L), sub  
Your setting will be activated.  
PCM : Convert the Dolby Digital into PCM  
(2 channel).  
When your amplifier/decoder is NOT com-  
patible with Dolby Digital, set to “PCM”.  
Stream : Outputs Dolby Digital signals.  
When your amplifier/decoder is compati-  
ble with Dolby Digital, set to “Stream”.  
PCM  
Do
PCM  
ntrol  
udio  
Stream  
DT
audio (R), or a mix of both (L/R)  
with your amplifier/decoder.  
Settings for DTS (Default : OFF)  
C
•
Select a setting using K / L buttons, then press ENTER button.  
Original  
OFF  
PCM  
Your setting will be activated.  
ON : Outputs DTS signals.  
When your amplifier/decoder is compatible with DTS, set to “ON”.  
OFF : No DTS signal is output.  
ON  
Dol
ntrol  
udio  
OFF  
OFF  
When your amplifier/decoder is NOT compatible with DTS, set to  
“OFF”.  
DTS  
Dynamic Range Control (Default : ON)  
Set to ON to compress the range between soft and loud sounds.  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
•
Select a setting using K /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
L
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
Parental Lock  
Parental Lock  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Your setting will be activated.  
•
Dynamic Range Control function  
is effective only with analog audio  
connection.  
ON  
O
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Fast Forward with Audio (Default : OFF)  
Set to ON to output the sound during playback in fast forward of x2.  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
•
Select a setting using K /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
L
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
Parental Lock  
Parental Lock  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Your setting will be activated.  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
O
OFF  
5
Press SETUP button to exit SETUP menu.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the SETUP menu  
Settings for Parental lock level  
Some DVD-Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. Playback  
will stop if the ratings exceed the levels you set, it will require  
you to enter a password before the disc will playback.This fea-  
ture prevents your children from viewing inappropriate materi-  
al.  
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
4
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
Press STOP button if you are playing a disc.  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
1
PLAY  
Press SETUP button to display SETUP/DISC menu.  
STOP  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
1
5
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
2
3
4
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
Setup Menu  
2
Select “SETUP” using { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
SETUP menu will appear.  
Setup  
Playback Setting  
3
Select “Playback” using K / L / { /  
B
buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
Note  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
Parental Lock  
• Parental lock function may  
not be available to some  
discs.  
• With some DVDs, it may be  
difficult to find if they are  
compatible with parental lock.  
Be sure to check if the  
parental lock function oper-  
ates in the way that you have  
set.  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
OFF  
4
Select “Parental Lock” using K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
• Record the password in case  
you forget it.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the SETUP menu  
Settings for Parental lock level (cont’d)  
Parental Lock (Default :All)  
Set the Parental Lock level.  
•
Change the parental level  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
TV Aspect  
etter Box  
All  
Parental Lock  
8
7
6
5
4
3
Parental Lock  
Option window will appear.  
Proceed to steps A or B.  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
ish  
inal  
2
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
1
OFF  
OFF  
A password has not been set yet  
A
•
Select “Yes” using s /  
B
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
buttons, then enter a new  
password using Number  
buttons.  
TV Aspect  
Change Password?  
Yes  
TV Aspect  
Password  
Yes  
No  
- - - -  
Parental Lock  
Parental Lock  
7
7
6
5
4
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
ish  
6
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
ish  
nal  
inal  
5
4
3
Your setting will be activated.  
3
2
2
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
1
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
1
OFF  
OFF  
• If you select “No”, proceed  
to Step 5.  
A password has been set already  
Change the password  
B
DVD  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
Setup > Playback  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
TV Aspect  
TV Aspect  
etter Box  
All  
Change Password?  
TV Aspect  
Password  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
- - - -  
Password  
Parental Lock  
Parental Lock  
8
Parental Lock  
* * * *  
7
7
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
sh  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
lish  
6
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
ish  
6
6
nal  
inal  
inal  
5
5
5
4
4
4
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
3
3
3
2
2
2
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
1
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
1
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
1
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
• If you select “No”, proceed  
to Step 5.  
•
Enter the current password  
using Number buttons.  
•
Select “Yes” using s /  
B
buttons, then enter a new  
password using Number  
buttons.  
Your setting will be activated.  
Note  
• Press CLEAR/C.RESET button  
to erase numbers entered  
incorrectly.  
• When you forget the pass-  
word or you want to clear all  
settings in Parental lock, enter  
4,7,3,7 using Number buttons  
in option window. Password  
will be cleared and parental  
levels will be set to All.  
5
Press SETUP button to exit SETUP menu.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR functions  
Playback  
VCR  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
3
1
1
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
During playback, press  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
Press POWER button on the  
remote control or the front  
panel of the unit.  
PAUSE F button.  
Playback will pause and sound will  
be muted.  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
When you are playing a video-  
tape, turn the TV on and be sure  
to select the input to which the  
unit is connected.  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
3
5
4
PLAY  
2
4
STOP  
Press PLAY B button to  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
VCR  
resume play.  
Press:  
Note  
5
2
• When a videotape without  
record tab is inserted, the  
unit will start playback auto-  
matically.  
Insert a prerecorded video-  
Press STOP C button to stop  
playback.  
tape, then press PLAY B but-  
ton to begin playback.  
• Tracking will be automatically  
adjusted upon playback.To  
adjust the tracking manually,  
press the CHANNEL K/L  
buttons on the front panel of  
the unit or CHK/CHL but-  
tons on the remote control.  
6
Press STOP/EJECT  
C
A but-  
ton on the front panel of the  
unit to eject the videotape.  
Recording and One-touch timer recording  
Recording  
PQRS  
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
VCR  
First:  
7
VCR  
SPACE  
0
Before recording, make sure:  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
•
The desired channel is selected  
by pressing the number buttons  
on the remote control or  
CHANNEL K/L buttons on the  
front panel of the unit.  
1
1
2
PLAY  
Press REC/OTR button to  
begin the recording.  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
RETURN  
To temporarily stop recording or  
1
ENTER  
REC MONITOR  
to resume it, press PAUSE F but-  
ton. After the unit has been in  
Pause mode for 5 minutes, it will  
stop automatically to protect the  
videotape and the video head  
from damage.  
•
•
There is a videotape with a  
record tab in the unit.  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
Note  
The desired recording speed is  
selected in SP (standard play) or  
SLP (super long play) mode by  
pressing REC MODE/REC SPEED  
button on the remote control.  
• To view one channel while  
recording another  
1) While you are recording on  
the unit, pressVIDEO/TV but-  
ton.  
2) At the cable box or satel-  
lite box, select the channel  
you want to view.  
If you have connected the  
unit to a cable box or satellite  
box, refer to “Connection to  
a Cable Box or Satellite Box”  
section on page 15.  
2
Recording speed:  
Tape speed  
Type of tape  
SP mode  
Recording/PlaybackTime  
Press STOP button when the  
recording is completed.  
T60  
T120  
2hours  
6hours  
T160  
2-2/3hours  
8hours  
1hour  
3hours  
SLP mode  
Accidental erasure prevention  
To prevent accidental recording  
on a recorded videotape,  
remove its record tab.To  
record on it later, cover the  
•
•
Stereo or SAP is selected. Refer  
to page 21.  
Refer to page 34 for instructions  
on timer recording.  
Record tab  
hole with cellophane tape.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR functions  
Recording and One-touch timer recording (cont’d)  
One-touch timer recording  
PLAY  
STOP  
VCR  
1
This feature allows you to set the  
recording length simply by pressing  
REC/OTR button on the remote  
control or the front panel of the unit.  
(0:30)  
(1:00)  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
(Normal recording)  
(8:00)  
1
(7:30)  
Note  
When one-touch timer recording  
is finished, the unit will turn off  
automatically.  
•
The remaining recording time  
will appear on the display panel  
during an one-touch timer  
recording. Press DISPLAY but-  
ton to see it on the TV screen.  
You cannot pause a one-  
VCR  
First:  
1
To change the recording length  
during the one-touch timer  
recording, press REC/OTR repeat-  
edly until the desired length  
appear.  
During normal recording,  
press REC/OTR button to  
begin one-touch timer  
recording.  
•
touch timer recording.  
•
If OTR is finished inVCR during  
playback or REC mode in DVD, the  
VCR will be in STOP mode and  
the DVD keeps the current mode.  
Unlike a timer recording, you can  
perform the following operations  
during a one-touch timer recording.  
You can select a fixed recording  
time by pressing the REC/OTR  
button repeatedly.  
To cancel the one-touch timer  
recording within the specified  
time, press STOP C button.  
•
-
-
Turning the power off  
Using REC or STOP  
C
buttons.  
Search  
Index search  
VCR  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
3
An index mark will be assigned at  
the beginning of each recording  
you make.You may skip to a specif-  
ic marked point by following the  
steps below.  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
Press g/h buttons to  
start index search.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
2
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
If you want to go in the forward  
direction, press g button.  
If you want to go in the reverse  
SPACE  
0
VCR  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
First:  
direction, press h button.  
After index search, theVCR will  
play the videotape automatically.  
CURRENT PROGRAM  
3
PLAY  
1
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
Press SEARCH MODE button  
so that the index search  
menu appears.  
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Beginning  
of tape  
End  
of tape  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
Pro.1 Pro.2 Pro.3 Pro.4 Pro.5  
02 01 01 02 03  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
2
CM SKIP  
MODE  
INDEX MARK  
Enter the number of record-  
ings you wish to skip using  
Number buttons with in 30  
seconds.  
1
INDEX SEARCH  
03  
Note  
• Every time a videotape is  
recorded, an index mark is  
written on the videotape.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR functions  
Search (cont’d)  
Time search  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
VCR  
TIME SEARCH  
2:50  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
This feature allows you to go to a  
specific point on a videotape by  
entering the exact amount of time  
you wish to skip in order to reach  
the point.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
2
1
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
3
VCR  
First:  
PLAY  
3
STOP  
Press g/h buttons to  
start time search.  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
Press SEARCH MODE button  
repeatedly so that theTime  
search menu appears.  
If you want to go in the forward  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
direction, press  
If you want to go in the reverse  
direction, press button.  
After time search, the unit will play  
the videotape automatically.  
g
button.  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
h
2
Note  
Enter your desired time to  
skip using Number buttons  
with in 30 seconds.  
• These functions are not avail-  
able during recording.  
• Press STOP button to stop  
the search.  
• If the end of the videotape is  
reached during a Search, this  
unit will cancel the search and  
rewind the videotape.  
Other operations  
VCR  
VCR  
First:  
Fast forward:  
When the unit is in stop mode, press g to fast forward the videotape.  
Rewind:  
When the unit is in stop mode, press h to rewind the videotape.  
To cue or review picture during playback (Picture Search):  
Press g/h buttons during playback.  
Press it again and the unit will search in super high speed. (in the SLP mode only)  
Note  
To freeze the picture onTV screen during playback (Still mode):  
Press PAUSE F button. Each time you press the button, the picture will  
be forwarded by one frame.  
If the picture begins to vibrate vertically during the still mode, stabilize  
the picture by pressing the CHANNEL K/L or CHK/CHL buttons.  
If the picture is distorted or rolling vertically, adjust the vertical hold  
control on your TV, if equipped.  
• Still/Slow/Pause mode will be  
automatically cancelled after 5  
minutes to prevent damage to  
the videotape and the video  
head.  
• To return to playback from  
the Picture Search/Still/Slow  
mode, press PLAY button.  
Counter Reset:  
Press CLEAR/C.RESET button.  
To playback in slow motion:  
Press SLOW  
button during playback or the still mode.  
If the noise bars appear on the TV screen, you can reduce it by pressing  
Your Selection  
Hi-Fi  
R-channel  
MONO  
Monaural  
L+R  
CHANNEL K/L or CHK/CHL buttons.  
L-channel  
Type of recorded tape  
Automatic Rewind  
When a videotape is played or fast forwarded to its end, the videotape  
will rewind to the beginning, stop, and eject itself.  
When you playback a videotape recorded in Hi-Fi stereo:  
Press AUDIO button on the remote control to select Hi-Fi or MONO  
for playback sound mode.  
• If you have connected a stereo TV to this unit, select “Hi-Fi”.  
• If you have connected a monaural TV to this unit, select “MONO”.  
96  
non Hi-Fi tapes  
Monaural  
Monaural  
Hi-Fi tapes  
recorded in  
Hi-Fi stereo  
L
R
Hi-Fi tapes  
recorded main  
audio program  
Main audio  
program  
Main audio  
program  
Main audio  
program  
Hi-Fi tapes  
recorded second  
audio program  
Second audio Second audio Second audio  
program program program  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Troubleshooting  
Before requesting service for this unit, check the table below for a possible cause of the problem you are  
experiencing. Some simple checks or a minor adjustment on your part may eliminate the problem and  
restore proper operation.  
Symptom  
The power does not turn on.  
Remedy  
• Check that the AC power cord is connected securely.  
• (In case of power failure) Check the braker.  
There is no picture.  
• Re-connect the connecting cord securely.  
• The connecting cords are damaged.  
• Check the connection to yourTV (page 14).  
• Check the RF output channel when you view aTV program  
using RF connection.  
• Switch the input selector on yourTV (such as to "LINE1") so  
that the signal from this unit appears on theTV screen.  
TV program reception does not fill the  
screen.  
• Try to set the channels with "Auto Preset" in SETUP menu  
(page 19).  
•
Select a channel of anyTV program using the CH  
o
/
p
buttons.  
• PressVIDEO/TV button if necessary.  
TV program pictures are distorted.  
• AdjustTV antenna.  
• Adjust the picture (see theTV's instruction manual).  
• Place the unit andTV farther apart.  
• Place theTV and any bunched antenna cables farther apart.  
TV channels cannot be changed.  
Playback picture is distorted.  
• Switch the input toTV.  
• Connect the antenna cable correctly (page 14).  
• Keep the equipment which may cause electrical disturbances,  
such as a cellular phone, away.  
The playback picture orTV program from  
the equipment connected through the  
unit is distorted.  
•
If the playback picture output from a DVD player,VCR, or tuner goes  
through the unit before reaching yourTV, the copy-protection signal  
applied to some programs could affect picture quality. Disconnect the  
playback equipment in question and connect it directly to yourTV.  
D
V
D
•
V
C
R
There is no sound.  
• Re-connect all connections securely.  
• The connecting cord is damaged.  
• Check the connections to the amplifier input.  
• The input source setting on the amplifier is incorrect.  
• The unit is in pause mode or in Slow-motion Play mode.  
• The unit is in fast forward or fast reverse mode.  
The channel cannot be changed from the  
channel you are recording.  
• Set theTV's input to "TV".  
Nothing was recorded even though you  
set the timer setting correctly.  
• There was a power failure during recording.  
• The internal clock of the unit stopped due to a power failure  
that lasted for more than 30 seconds.  
Reset the clock (pages 22-24).  
• Disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet, and  
connect it again.  
•
The program contains copy protection signals that restricts copying.  
• The timer setting overlapped with another setting that was set  
later or has priority.  
Timer recording is not complete or did  
not start from the beginning.  
• The timer setting overlapped with another setting that was set  
later or has priority (page 36).  
• Disc space was not enough.  
Timer recording is impossible.  
•
Make sure indicator appears on the front display of this unit. If not,  
press POWER button.  
The remote control does not function.  
• Batteries are weak.  
• There are obstacles between the remote and the unit.  
• The remote control is far from the unit.  
• There are no batteries in the remote.  
• Turn on the unit.  
•
•
The remote control is not pointed at the remote sensor on the unit.  
Press the DVD orVCR button, whichever you need.Then, try again.  
• If above remedies do not solve the problem, please call the  
Service Center for help.  
The unit does not operate properly.  
• When static electricity, etc., causes the unit to operate  
abnormally, unplug the unit and then plug it in again.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Troubleshooting (cont’d)  
Symptom  
There is no picture.  
Remedy  
• The Setup Display appears. Press RETURN  
button to turn  
off the display.  
• Check if the INTERLACE/PROGRESSIVE mode is set correctly  
according to yourTV. See page 14.  
Picture noise appears.  
There is no sound.  
• The disc is dirty or flawed.  
•
If the picture output signal from the unit passes through yourVCR  
to get to yourTV, or if you are connected to a combination  
TV/VIDEO player, the copy-protection signal applied to some DVD  
programs could affect picture quality. If you still experience this  
problem even when you connect the unit directly to yourTV, try  
connecting the unit to yourTV's S-VIDEO input.  
•
If the audio signal does not come through the DIGITAL OUT  
(COAXIAL) jack, check the Audio Setup settings (pages 90-91).  
• The disc is dirty or flawed.  
Sound is noisy.  
• The disc is dirty or flawed.  
The disc does not play.  
• No disc is inserted.  
• A blank disc is inserted.  
•
The disc is upside down. Insert the disc with the labeled side facing up.  
• The disc is not correctly inserted.  
• The unit cannot play certain discs (such as a CD-ROM) (page  
43).  
• The region code on the DVDVIDEO does not match the unit  
(page 43).  
• Moisture has condensed inside the unit. Remove the disc and  
leave the unit turned on for about two hours until the moisture  
evaporates (page 4).  
• If the disc was recorded on another recorder, the unit cannot  
play the disc if it was not finalized (page 41).  
Playback image freezes for a second.  
• During the playback of two layered disc, picture may freeze for  
a moment when the 1st layer switches to the 2nd layer.This is  
not a malfunction.  
D
V
D
The disc does not start playback from the • Resume play was activated (page 48). Press STOP C button  
beginning.  
twice.  
• You have inserted a disc whoseTitle menu or DVD menu  
automatically appears on theTV screen when it is first insert.  
The unit starts playing from the disc  
automatically.  
• The DVDVIDEO features an auto playback function.  
Some functions such as Stop, Search, or  
Slow-motion Play cannot be performed.  
•
Depending on the disc, you may not be able to do some of the  
operations above. See the instruction manual supplied with the disc.  
The language for the sound track cannot  
be changed.  
• Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the DVDVIDEO,  
DVD-R or DVD-RW being played.  
• The DVDVIDEO prohibits the changing of the language for the  
sound track.  
• Try changing the language using the DVDVIDEO's menu.  
The subtitle language cannot be changed  
or turned off.  
• Multilingual subtitle are not recorded on the DVDVIDEO.  
• The DVDVIDEO prohibits changing of the subtitles.  
• Try changing the subtitle using the DVDVIDEO's menu.  
The angles cannot be changed.  
• Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVDVIDEO being played.  
• You are trying to change the angles when  
appear on theTV screen (page 58).  
icon does not  
• The DVDVIDEO prohibits changing angles.  
• Try changing the angle using the DVDVIDEO's menu.  
Recording does not stop immediately  
after you press STOP C button.  
• It will take a few seconds for the unit to input disc data before  
recording can stop.  
Recording does not start immediately  
after you press REC/OTR button.  
• An unused DVD-R or DVD-RW was inserted. It takes a while  
for the unit to automatically format a DVD-RW.  
The disc tray does not open when you  
press OPEN/CLOSE A button.  
• It may take a few seconds for the disc tray to open after you  
have recorded or edited a disc.  
• This is because the unit is adding disc data to the disc.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Troubleshooting (cont’d)  
Symptom  
The disc tray does not open when you  
press OPEN/CLOSE A button.  
Remedy  
• It may take a few seconds for the disc tray to open after you  
have recorded or edited a disc.  
• This is because the unit is adding disc data to the disc.  
D
V
D
"Repairing" appears on the display.  
Repairing  
• If there is a power failure or unplugging during recording,  
finalizing, formatting or editing, a Repairing process will begin  
automatically just after turning the unit on again.  
It may take several minutes up to about four hours.  
Picture noise appears.  
• Head cleaning forVCR may be necessary.  
Refer to “AUTO HEAD CLEANING”.  
• Adjust tracking control for better picture by pressing  
CHANNEL (o /p) buttons on this unit or CH (o /p)  
buttons while you are playing a videotape.  
• No videotape is inserted.  
• Make sure the videotape has a record tab when you record to a  
videotape. If needed, cover the hole with cellophane tape.  
V
C
R
The tape does not play.  
Recording does not start immediately  
after you press REC/OTR button.  
The remote control does not function.  
The motor rotates even when playback /  
recording is stopped.  
• Check if a videotape is in this unit.  
• The motor may rotate for the duration of approximately 5  
minutes for efficient operation.This is not a malfunction.  
Error message  
Cause  
Solution  
Disc Error  
--- Please eject the disc. ---  
Playback feature may not be  
available on this Disc.  
Unplayable disc is inserted  
in the unit.  
The disc is upside down.  
Insert the standardized disc which  
bear the marks on page 43.  
Insert the disc with the labeled side  
facing up.  
Region Error  
Playback is not authorized  
in the region of the DVD-Video  
disc which you inserted in the unit.  
Insert the DVD-Video disc with  
region codes 1 or ALL.  
--- Please eject the disc. ---  
Playback is not authorized in your  
region.  
Parental Lock On  
--- Please eject the disc. ---  
The current selected parental level  
Prohibits playback.  
The current selected parental  
level in the SETUP Menu  
prohibits playback.  
Check the "Parental Lock" setting  
(pages 92-93).  
Recording Error  
This program is not allowed  
to be recorded.  
The recording function encountered  
the copy prohibited program.  
You cannot record copy prohibited  
programs.  
Recording Error  
This program is not  
recordable inVideo mode.  
You are trying to record the copy-  
once program onto the DVD-RW  
disc inVideo mode.  
Set "DVD-RW Recording Format"  
to "VR mode" (page 29).  
You are trying to record onto the  
disc which is unrecordable, or the  
disc status is unable to record.  
The disc is dirty.  
Insert the recordable disc, and  
ensure the disc status satisfies the  
recording requirements (pages 27-28).  
Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth.  
Replace the disc.  
Recording Error  
Can not record on this disc.  
The disc is damaged.  
You are trying to record the copy-  
once program onto the DVD-RW  
disc which is not compatible with  
CPRM.  
Insert the DVD-RW disc  
(ver.1.1 compatible with CPRM).  
Recording Error  
This program is not allowed to  
be recorded on this disc.  
Recording Error  
You are trying to record on to the  
protected disc which is set in the  
Disc Setting Menu.  
Release the disc protect setting  
in the Disc Setting menu (page 42).  
This disc is protected and not  
recordable.  
Recording Error  
Disc is full.  
(No area for new recording)  
You are trying to record onto  
the disc which has no space  
for recording.  
Insert the recordable disc with  
enough recording space.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Troubleshooting (cont’d)  
Error message  
Cause  
Solution  
Recording Error  
You are trying to record onto the  
disc on which the number of  
recording titles comes up to the  
maximum (99).  
Delete unnecessary titles  
(pages 61, 65, 74).  
You cannot record more  
than 99 titles on one disc.  
(The maximum is 99)  
Recording Error  
You cannot record more than  
999 chapters on one disc.  
You are trying to record onto the  
VR mode DVD-RW disc on which  
the number of recording chapters  
comes up to the maximum (999).  
Delete unnecessary chapter  
markers (pages 69, 78).  
(The maximum is 999)  
Recording Error  
This disc has no space to write  
the Control Information when  
recording or deleting contents.  
Delete unnecessary titles  
(pages 61, 65, 74).  
You cannot record on this disc  
as Control Information is full.  
When editing has been repeatedly  
performed, the control Information  
area may come up to be full even  
the recording area has enough space.  
Recording Error  
When recordings are performed  
repeatedly onto an unstable disc,  
this area may come up to be full.  
Insert a new disc.  
You cannot record on the  
disc as Power Calibration  
Area is full.  
Every time you insert a disc for  
recording, the disc's working area  
will be taken up. And if you repeat  
this frequently, it will be used up  
sooner and you may not be able  
to record full 99 titles.  
Recording Error  
You are trying to record onto  
the disc already finalized.  
Release the finalizing for this disc  
(page 41).  
This disc is already finalized.  
* If you are still having trouble with this unit after checking Troubleshooting, write down the error code and the error  
description, and contact a Sharp Authorized Service Center for inspection. (See Service Information on page 103.)  
RF converter output  
You can watch the TV programs with  
1
2
3
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
the tuner of the unit. (Usually channel  
3 or 4 of the TV is available for the  
RF converter setting.) Be sure to con-  
nect the unit to a TV using the Round  
Coaxial cable. Refer to page 14.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
.@/:  
1
SPACE  
0
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
for more than  
3 seconds  
2
SPACE  
0
1
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Select channel 3 on yourTV.  
• Be sure that the unit is in DVD  
mode.  
PLAY  
3 seconds  
STOP  
(
(
(
)
RF ON CH4  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
3 seconds  
2
ENTER  
SKIP  
REC MONITOR  
)
PressVIDEO/TV button on  
the remote control.  
RF ON CH3  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
RETURN  
SKIP  
3 seconds  
CLEAR/C.RESET ZOOM  
SEARCH  
•
If noise appears, change the RF  
output channel of the unit to CH  
4 by pressingVIDEO/TV button  
for 3 seconds.The RF output  
channel will alternate between  
CH3 and CH4 as follows.  
CM SKIP  
MODE  
)
RF ON CH4  
3 seconds  
•
Changing the RF output channel  
is available only when the unit is  
in DVD mode.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Language code  
Language  
Code  
Language  
Code  
Language  
Code  
(Afan) Oromo  
Abkhazian  
Afar  
Afrikaans  
Albanian  
Amharic  
Arabic  
Armenian  
Assamese  
Aymara  
Azerbaijani  
Bashkir  
6159  
4748  
4747  
4752  
6563  
4759  
4764  
5471  
4765  
4771  
4772  
4847  
5167  
4860  
5072  
4854  
4855  
4864  
4853  
5971  
4851  
5759  
4947  
7254  
4961  
5464  
4965  
5047  
6058  
5160  
5161  
5166  
5261  
5256  
5255  
5264  
5271  
5358  
5747  
5051  
5158  
5758  
5360  
5367  
5447  
5569  
Hindi  
5455  
5467  
5565  
5560  
5547  
5551  
5557  
5347  
5566  
5647  
5669  
5760  
5765  
5757  
6469  
5771  
6460  
5761  
5767  
5861  
5847  
5868  
5860  
5866  
5957  
5953  
5965  
5958  
5966  
5955  
5964  
5961  
5960  
6047  
6051  
6061  
6149  
6164  
6247  
6265  
5247  
6258  
6266  
6367  
6459  
6461  
Russian  
Samoan  
Sangho  
Sanskrit  
Scots Gaelic  
Serbian  
Serbo-Croatian  
Sesotho  
Setswana  
Shona  
Sindhi  
Singhalese  
Siswat  
Slovak  
Slovenian  
Somali  
Spanish  
Sundanese  
Swahili  
Swedish  
Tagalog  
Tajik  
Tamil  
Tatar  
Telugu  
Thai  
Tibetan  
Tigrinya  
Tonga  
Tsonga  
Turkish  
Turkmen  
Twi  
Ukrainian  
Urdu  
Uzbek  
Vietnamese  
Volapuk  
Welsh  
Wolof  
Xhosa  
6467  
6559  
6553  
6547  
5350  
6564  
6554  
6566  
6660  
6560  
6550  
6555  
6565  
6557  
6558  
6561  
5165  
6567  
6569  
6568  
6658  
6653  
6647  
6666  
6651  
6654  
4861  
6655  
6661  
6665  
6664  
6657  
6669  
6757  
6764  
6772  
6855  
6861  
4971  
6961  
7054  
5655  
7161  
7267  
Hungarian  
Icelandic  
Indonesian  
Interlingua  
Interlingue  
Inupiak  
Irish  
Italian  
Japanese  
Javanese  
Kannada  
Kashmiri  
Kazakh  
Kinyarwanda  
Kirghiz  
Kirundi  
Korean  
Kurdish  
Laothian  
Latin  
Latvian; Lettish  
Lingala  
Lithuanian  
Macedonian  
Malagasy  
Malay  
Malayalam  
Maltese  
Maori  
Marathi  
Moldavian  
Mongolian  
Nauru  
Nepali  
Norwegian  
Occitan  
Oriya  
Panjabi  
Pashto; Pushto  
Persian  
Polish  
Portuguese  
Quechua  
Rhaeto-Romance  
Romanian  
Basque  
Bengali;Bangla  
Bhutani  
Bihari  
Bislama  
Breton  
Bulgarian  
Burmese  
Byelorussian  
Cambodian  
Catalan  
Chinese  
Corsican  
Croatian  
Czech  
Danish  
Dutch  
English  
Esperanto  
Estonian  
Faroese  
Fiji  
Finnish  
French  
Frisian  
Galician  
Georgian  
German  
Greek  
Greenlandic  
Guarani  
Gujarati  
Hausa  
Yiddish  
Yoruba  
Zulu  
Hebrew  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Glossary  
Dolby Digital  
Analog audio  
Progressive Scan (480p)  
A type of display that does not  
split each frame into fields, and  
instead scans directly through all  
the scanlines of each frame in  
order. Progressive Scan provides  
less flickering and higher image  
resolution than traditional (480i)  
TV signals. Refer to page 14 for  
instructions on selective  
An electrical signal that directly  
represents sound. Compare this  
to digital audio which can be an  
electrical signal, but is an indirect  
representation of sound. See also  
Digital audio.  
The system to compress digital  
sound developed by Dolby  
Laboratories. It offers you sound  
of stereo(2ch) or multi-channel  
audio (up to 5.1ch).  
DTS (DigitalTheater System)  
Aspect ratio  
DTS is a 5.1channel surround  
sound system, but it is different  
The width of a TV screen relative  
to its height. Conventional TVs are from Dolby Digital.The formats  
4:3 (in other words, the screen is were developed by Digital Theater  
almost square); widescreen models System, Inc.  
are 16:9 (the screen is almost  
Progressive Scan mode.  
Regions code  
Regions associate discs and play-  
ers with particular areas of the  
world.This unit will only play discs  
that have compatible region  
codes.You can find the region  
code of your unit by looking on  
the rear panel. Some discs are  
compatible with more than one  
region (or all regions).  
Finalize  
twice as wide as it is high).  
To make DVD discs, which have  
Chapter  
been recorded on, possible to play  
in DVD players.With this unit, it is  
possible to finalize DVD-RW/  
DVD-R discs.  
Just as a book is split up into sev-  
eral chapters, a title on a DVD  
disc is usually divided into chap-  
ters. See also Title.  
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)  
Component video output  
MP3 is a method of compressing  
files.You can copy MP3 files on  
CD-RW/R discs from the comput-  
Sampling frequency  
Each signal of luminance(Y) and  
component(PB/CB, PR/CR) is inde-  
pendent to output so that you can er and play the files on this unit.  
experience picture color as it is.  
Also, due to compatibility with  
(Pulse Code Modulation)  
progressive video (480p), you can  
The rate which sound is measured  
by a specified interval to turn into  
digital audio data.The numbers of  
sampling in one second defines as  
sampling frequency.The higher the  
rate, the better the sound quality  
as possible as it is.  
PCM  
The most common system of  
encoding digital audio, found on  
CDs and DAT. Excellent quality,  
but requires a lot of data com-  
pared to formats such as Dolby  
Digital and MPEG audio. For com-  
patibility with digital audio  
experience higher-density picture  
than that in interlace (480i).  
SAP  
CPRM  
(Content Protection for  
Recordable Media)  
(Secondary Audio Program)  
Sub-audio channel which is deliv-  
ered separately from main-audio  
channel.This audio channel is used  
as an alternate in bilingual broad-  
casting.  
CPRM is a copy protection sys-  
tem with scramble system regard- recorders (CD, MD and DAT) and  
ing the recording of “copy-once”  
broadcast programs (e.g. some  
satellite broadcasts).  
AV amplifiers with digital inputs,  
this unit can convert Dolby Digital  
and MPEG audio to PCM. See also  
Digital audio.  
S-Video output  
It delivers independently each sig-  
nal of color(C) and luminance(Y)  
to TV as video signals, so that  
higher-quality picture will be  
gained.  
Digital audio  
Playlist  
An indirect representation of  
sound by numbers. During record- From this list you can play con-  
ing, the sound is measured at dis-  
crete intervals (44, 100 times a  
second for CD audio) by an ana-  
log-to-digital converter, generating directly.  
a stream of numbers. On playback,  
a digital-to-analog converter gen-  
erates an analog signal based on  
these numbers. See also Sampling  
frequency and Analog audio.  
tents of a disc as your desired  
order or in sequence.Also it is  
allowed to search a specific scene  
Title (DVD only)  
A collection of chapters on DVD  
disc. See also chapter.  
Track  
Audio CDs use tracks to divide  
up the content of a disc.The DVD  
equivalent is called a chapter. See  
also Chapter.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Specifications  
General  
System  
DVD-Video, DVD-RW/R, CD-DA, CD-RW/R,  
Video CassetteTape  
VCR video heads  
Power requirements  
Power consumption  
Weight  
Four heads  
AC120V, 60 Hz  
37W (standby: 4.3W)  
9.5 lbs ( 4.3 kg )  
Dimensions (width x height x depth)  
Operating temperature  
Operating humidity  
TV format  
17 1/8" x 3 15/16" x 10 1/4" (435 x 100 x 261 mm)  
41Fº to 104Fº (5ºC to 40ºC)  
5% to 85% (no condensation)  
NTSC  
Recording  
Recording format  
Video Recording format (DVD-RW only), Video format (DVD-RW, DVD-R)  
Recordable discs  
DVD-ReWritable, DVD-Recordable  
Video recording format  
Sampling frequency  
Compression format  
13.5MHz  
MPEG  
Audio recording format  
Sampling frequency  
Compression format  
48kHz  
Dolby Digital  
Tuner  
Receivable channels  
VHF  
2-13ch  
UHF  
CATV  
14-69ch  
C1-C125ch  
RF Converter  
Converter output  
Built-inVHF converter  
VHF channel 3 or 4  
Input/Output  
VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal  
VHF/UHF set 75Ω  
Video input  
Input level  
Jacks  
Input 1 (rear), 2 (front)  
1Vp-p (75Ω)  
RCA jack  
Video output  
Output level  
Jacks  
1Vp-p (75Ω)  
RCA jack  
S-Video input  
Y (Iuminance) - Input level  
C (color) - Input level  
Jacks  
Input 1 (rear), 2 (front)  
1Vp-p (75Ω)  
286 mVp-p (75Ω)  
4 pin mini DIN  
S-Video output  
Y (Iuminance) - Output level  
C (color) - Output level  
Jacks  
1Vp-p (75Ω)  
286 mVp-p (75Ω)  
4 pin mini DIN  
Component video output  
Output level  
Jacks  
Y: 1.0Vp-p (75Ω), PB/CB, PR/CR: 0.7Vp-p (75Ω)  
RCA jacks  
Audio input  
During audio input  
Jacks  
Input 1 (rear), 2 (front) L/R  
2V rms (47kΩ)  
RCA jacks  
Audio output  
During audio output  
Jacks  
Output 1,2 L/R  
2V rms (47kΩ)  
RCA jacks  
Digital audio output  
Output level  
Jacks  
500 mVp-p (75Ω)  
RCA jack  
Note:  
The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice.  
Service Information (For the U.S.)  
For the location of the nearest Sharp Authorized Service Center, or to obtain product literature, accessories,  
supplies or customer assistance, please call 1-800-BE-SHARP (1-800-237-4277) or visit SHARP’s website  
(http://www.sharpusa.com).  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Español  
Precaciones  
Para futura referencia, anote los números de modelo y de serie (indica-  
dos en la parte posterior esta unidad) en el espacio provisto.  
No. de modelo:  
No. de serie:  
AVISO: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE INCENDIO O ELECTROCHOQUE NO  
EXPONGA ESTE APARATO A LA HUMEDAD.  
PRECAUCIÓN: PARA EVITAR DESCARGAS ELÉCTRICAS, HAGA QUE LA  
PALETA ANCHA DEL ENCHUFE COINCIDA CON LA RANURA ANCHA E  
INTRODÚZCALA HASTA EL FONDO.  
PRECAUCION  
Este símbolo previene al usuario del voltaje  
aislado dentro de la unidad que puede provocar  
descargas eléctricas peligrosas.  
PELIGRO DE DESCARGA ELECTRICA NO  
ABRIR DECLARACIÓN DE CONFORMIDAD  
PRECAUCION:  
Este símbolo advierte al usuario que existen  
instrucciones de operación y de mantenimien-  
to en la literatura incluida en esta unidad.  
TPARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE DESCARGA ELEC-  
TRICA, NO QUITE LA CUBIERTA. EL USUARIO NO  
DEBERA DAR NINGUN TIPO DE SERVICIO A NINGU-  
NA PARTE INTERNA. DEBERA SER REALIZADO SOLO  
POR PERSONAL DE SERVICIO CALIFICADO.  
“ADVERTENCIA—Las reglas de la FCC (Comisión Federal de Comunicaciones) estip-  
ulan que cualquier modificación o cambio a este equipo no aprobado expresamente por  
el fabricante podrá anular la autorización del usuario para operar este equipo”.  
Este dispositivo cumple con la Parte 15 de las reglas de la FCC (Comisión Federal de Comunicaciones). La operación  
se encuentra sujeta a las dos condiciones siguientes:  
(1) Este dispositivo no debería producir interferencias perjudiciales, y  
(2) este dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia recibida, incluyendo las que puedan producir una operación  
indeseable.  
INFORMACION  
Este equipo se ha sometido a todo tipo de pruebas y cumple con las normas establecidas para dispositivo digital de  
Clase B, de conformidad con la Parte 15 de las reglas de la FCC (Comisión Federal de Comunicaciones). Estas reglas  
están diseñadas para asegurar una protección razonable contra interferencias perjudiciales en las instalaciones residen-  
ciales. Este equipo genera, utiliza y puede emitir energía de radiofrecuencia y, si no se instala y utiliza debidamente, es  
decir, conforme a las instrucciones, podrían producirse interferencias perjudiciales en las radiocomunicaciones. Sin  
embargo, no se garantiza que estas interferencias no se produzcan en una instalación determinada. Si este equipo oca-  
siona interferencias en la recepción de radio o televisión, lo cual puede comprobarse con sólo apagar y encender el  
equipo, intente corregir el problema mediante una o una combinación de las siguientes medidas:  
—Reoriente la antena receptora o cámbiela de lugar.  
—Aumente la separación entre el equipo y el receptor.  
—Enchufe el equipo a una toma de corriente situada en un circuito distinto del receptor.  
—Consulte a su distribuidor o a un técnico experto en radio/televisión.  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.  
Este aparato digital de la Clase B cumple con la norma ICES-003 de Canadá.  
PRECAUCION:  
ESTA UNIDAD HA SIDO CLASIFICADA COMO PRODUCTO CLASS 1 LASER.  
EL USO DE MANDOS O AJUSTES O LA REALIZACION DE PROCEDIMIENTOS DISTINTOS DE LOS INDICADOS EN  
LA PRESENTE IMPLICA EL RIESGO DE EXPOSICION A UNA RADIACION PELIGROSA.  
COMO LOS RAYOS LASER UTILIZADOS EN ESTA UNIDAD PUEDEN RESULTAR PERJUDICIALES PARA SUS OJOS,  
NO INTENTE DESARMAR EL GABINETE. SOLICITE EL SERVICIO UNICAMENTE A PERSONAL CUALIFICADO.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Español  
Precaciones (cont.)  
Importantes Medidas de Seguridad y Precauciones  
1) Lea las instrucciones - Lea detenidamente todas las instruc-  
ciones de seguridad y operación antes de usar el producto.  
2) Conserve las instrucciones - Conserve las instrucciones de  
seguridad y operación para consultas futuras.  
3) Respete las advertencias - Observe estrictamente todas las  
advertencias impresas en el producto y las incluidas en el  
manual de instrucciones.  
4) Siga las instrucciones - Siga todas las instrucciones de operación.  
5) Limpieza - Desconecte el producto del tomacorriente mural  
antes de limpiarlo. No use limpiadores líquidos ni aerosol.  
Use un paño húmedo para la limpieza del producto.  
unidad de descarga de la antena, conexión a los electrodos tierra,  
y requerimientos de los electrodos tierra (Fig. A).  
FIGURA A  
CABLE DE COBRE  
PARA LA ANTENA.  
EJEMPLO DE CONEXIÓN A TIERRA DE ANTENA DE  
ACUERDO CON EL CÓDIGO ELÉCTRICO NACIONAL.  
ABRAZADERA  
DE LA ANTENA.  
UNIDAD PARA LA DESCARGA  
DE LA ANTENA  
(NEC SECCIÓN 810-20)  
EQUIPO PARA EL  
SERVICIO  
ELÉCTRICO  
CONDUCTORES TIERRA  
(NEC SECCIÓN 810-21)  
ABRAZADERA A TIERRA.  
6) Enchufes - No use enchfes no recomendados por el fabricante  
del producto, ya que podría ser peligroso.  
7) Agua y humedad - No use este producto cerca del agua, por  
CÓDIGO DE NEC NATIONAL ELECTRIC  
S2898A  
SISTEMA DE ELECTRODOS PARA EL  
SUMINISTRO DE TOMA A TIERRA  
(NEC ARTÍCULO 250, PARTE H)  
ejemplo, cerca de una bañera o lavamanos, cerca del fre- 15) Tormentas eléctricas - Como medida adicional de protección  
gadero de la cocina o lavandería, en un piso mojado, cerca de  
una piscina, etc.  
durante tormentas eléctricas, o cuando el producto permanez-  
ca sin uso durante períodos prolongados de tiempo,  
desconéctelo del tomoacorriente mural y desconecte la antena  
o sistema de cable. Esto evitará que el grabador de videocas-  
settes resulte dañado por tormentas eléctricas o sobretensiones  
en la línea de alimentación.  
8) Accesorios - No instale este producto en un carro, soporte,  
trípode o mesa inestables. El grabador de videocassettes  
podría caerse, causando serias lesiones a un niño o adulto,  
resultando también severamente dañado. Uselo sólo el un  
carro, soporte, trípode o mesa recomendados por el fabri- 16) Líneas de alimentación - Un antena exterior no debe ser insta-  
cante, o vendidos con el producto. Toda instalación del pro-  
ducto deberán hacerse de acuerdo a las instrucciones del fab-  
ricante, empleando los accesorios de instalación recomenda-  
lada en la cercanía de líneas de alimentación aéreas ni de otros  
circuitos de potencial para iluminación eléctrica, o donde  
pueda caerse y hacer contacto con tales líneas o circuitos. Al  
instalar un sistema de antena exterior, enta mucho cuidado de  
no tocar tales líneas o circuitos de alimentación, ya que el con-  
tacto con ellos podría será fatal.  
dos por el mismo.  
ADVERTENCIA SOBRE EL USO  
DE CARROS PORTÁTILES  
9) La combinación de producto y  
carro debe ser movida con cuida-  
do. Las detenciones bruscas, la  
fuerza excesiva y las superficies  
disparejas podrán hacer que el pro-  
ducto y el carro se vuelquen.  
17) Sobrecarga - No sobrecargue los tomacorrientes murales ni los  
cables de extensión, ya que esto podría causar incendios o  
descargas eléctricas.  
18) Entrada de objetos y líquidos - Nunca introduzca objetos de  
ningún tipo por las aberturas de sete producto, ya que pordría  
tocar peligrosos puntos de alta tensión o cortocircuitar partes,  
provocando incendios o descargas elécticas. Nunca derrame  
ningún tipo de líquido sobre el producto.  
10) Ventilación - El gabinete del produc-  
S3125A  
to tiene renuras y aberturas de venti-  
lación que garantizan el funcionamiento confiable del producto,  
evitando que se recaliente. Estas aberturas no deberán ser blo-  
quear las aberturas, nunca setúe el grabador de videocassettes 19) Servicio - No intente reparar el producto usted mismo; al abrir  
encima de una cama, sofá, alfombra u otra superficie similar. El  
grabador de videocassettes no debe ser instalado en un mueble  
o desmontar las cobiertas usted se expondrá a alta tensión y a  
otros peligros. Solicite todo servicio a personal calificado.  
emportado, como una repisa para libros o bastidor, a menos que 20) Daños que requieran reparación - En los siguientes casos,  
se pueda garantizar una ventilación adecuada, o cuando las  
instrucciones del fabricante así lo especifiquen.  
desconecte el producto del tomacorriente mural y llame a un  
técnico de servicio calificado:  
11) Alimentación - Este grabador de videocassettes sólo debe ser  
operado mediante el tipo de fuente de alimentación especificado  
en la etiqueta indicadora. Si no seta seturo del tipo de fuente de  
alimentación que tiene en su casa, consulte a su distribuidor o a  
la compañía de electricidad local En el caso de grabador de  
doseñados para funcionar a pilas o con otras fuentes de ali-  
mentación, consulte el manuel de instrucciones respectivo.  
12) Conexión a tierra o polarización - Este producto está equipa-  
do con una clavija polarizada de corriente alterna (una clavi-  
ja que tiene una espiga más ancha que la otra). Esta clavija  
solamente pordá ser insertada en el tomacorriente en una sola  
dirección. Esta es una medida de seguridad. Si no puediera  
insertar completamente la clavija en el tomacorriente, vuelva  
a intentarlo invirtiendo la clavija. Si aún no fuera posible  
insertar la clavija, tome contacto con un electricista para que  
a) Cuando el cable de alimentación o la clavija estén dañados,  
b) Si se ha derramado líquido sobre la unidad, o si algún obje-  
to ha caído dentro del producto,  
c) Si el producto ha sido expuesto a la lluvia o al agua,  
d) Cuando a pesar de haber sebuido las instrucciones de  
operación, el producto no funcione normalmente. Ajuste  
solamente los controles mencionados en el manual de  
instrucciones; el ajuste incorrecto de otros controles podrá  
causar daños a la unidad, la que por lo general requerirá de  
un prolongado trabajo de reparación (por un técnico califi-  
cado) para que sus condiciones normales de operación  
puedan ser restablecidas,  
e) Si el producto se ha caído o si el gabinete se ha dañado.  
f) Cuando el producto muestre un cambio notorio en su  
rendimiento.  
repare su tomacorriente obsoleto . No modifique las carac- 21) Piezas de requesto - Cuando sea necesario reemplazar piezas,  
terísticas de seguridad de la clavija polarizada.  
asegúrese de que el técnico de servicio emplee las piezas de  
requesto especificadas por el fabricante, o piezas que tengan  
las mismas características que las piezas originales. Las susti-  
tuciones no autorizadas podrán causar incendios, descargas  
eléctricas y otoros problemas.  
13) Protección del cable de alimentación - Los cables de ali-  
mentación deberán ser tendidos de manera tal que la probabil-  
idad de que sean pisados o aplastados por otros objetos sea  
mínima. Preste especial atención a las clavijas de los cables, a  
los receptáculos, y al punto por donde salen del producto.  
14) Conexión Tierra de una Antena Exterior: Si una antena exterior o  
sistema de cable es conectado al aparato de vídeo, asegúrese de  
que la antena o el cableado tenga conexión tierra para conseguir  
de esta manera una protección contra voltajes no deseados y car-  
22) Revisión de seguridad - Al finalizar cualquier servicio de man-  
tenimiento o reparación de este producto, solicítele al técnico  
que efectúe comprobaciones de seguridad para determinar si el  
producto se encuentra o no en condiciones óptimas de  
operación.  
gas estáticas. El artículo 810 del Código de Electricidad Nacional 23) Calor - Este producto debe colocarse fuera del alcance de  
ANSI/NFPA número 70, proporciona información acerca de la  
manera adecuada de conexiones a tierra de la estructura del mástil  
y la estructura soporte, sobre la unidad del cable del interior de  
cobre de antena, tamaño de los conductores tierra, ubicación de la  
fuentes de calor tales como radiadores, rejillas de calefacción,  
estufas o cualquier otro producto destinado a producir calor,  
incluyendo los amplificadores.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Español  
Fácil grabación de DVD  
Estas instrucciones le ayudarán a entender fácilmente cómo grabar discos DVD.  
Nota:  
Asegúrese que las pilas están en el mando a distancia y que ha conectado correctamente esta unidad y el TV.  
Paso 1: Elija un tipo de disco  
Paso 2:Coloque un disco en blanco  
Mando a distancia  
Puede elegir entre distintos tipos de discos DVD  
grabables. Elija un tipo de disco DVD grabable de  
acuerdo con sus necesidades de  
reproducción/grabación.Vea los "tipos de discos  
DVD" en la parte inferior de esta página para más  
detalles sobre las diferencias entre los distintos  
medios compatibles.  
2
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
Para abrir  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
1
CH  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
Para  
encender  
Este grabador de DVD puede grabar los sigu-  
ientes tipos de discos.  
4.7  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
Para cerrar  
*
Esta unidad no puede grabar en los discos siguientes.  
3
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
• DVD-RWVer 1.2 / 2-4x compatible con CPRM  
CH  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
• DVD-R GeneralVer 2.0 / 8x  
Por ejemplo, cuando desea grabar repetidamente  
en el mismo disco o cuando desea editar el disco  
después de grabar, seleccione el disco de tipo  
regrabable DVD-RW.  
Cargando  
Esta operación puede  
demorar en reconocerse.  
Cuando desea guardar grabaciones sin alterarlos,  
un DVD no regrabable DVD-R puede ser más  
conveniente.  
Tipos de disco DVD  
Formato del disco  
.
Coloque el disco en el  
grabador. Haga el formato del  
disco del menú SETUP, exis-  
ten los formatos de video  
(modo deVideo) o de  
grabación de video (modo  
VR) según el tipo de disco  
colocado. Esto es necesario  
para preparar el disco para  
grabación.Vea los detalles en  
las páginas 29-30.  
: Más adecuado  
: Puede utilizar  
:
Algunas funciones son limitadas  
: No puede utilizar  
DVD-RW Video  
DVD-R  
Desea  
Grabar programas deTV  
DVD-RW VR  
Volver a utilizar borrando partes no deseadas  
Editar las grabaciones  
Editar/grabar de equipos conectados  
Copiar discos para distribución  
Reproducir en otro equipo de DVD  
*1  
*1  
Detalles  
Grabación  
¿Regrabable?  
DVD-RW VR  
DVD-RW Video  
DVD-R  
Sí  
Sí  
Sí  
Sí  
Sí  
Sí  
Sí  
No  
Sí  
Puede crear capítulos a intervalos fijos (auto.)  
Puede crear capítulos donde desee (manual)  
Puede grabar imágenes de tamaño 16:9  
Al formatear, todo el con-  
tenido de ese disco se  
borarán.  
• La unidad empieza a for-  
matear automáticamente  
cuando se inserta un disco  
no usado.  
No  
Sí  
No  
Sí  
Puede grabar un programa de Copia-una-vez  
No  
No  
Edición  
Puede hacer funciones de edición básica  
Sí  
Sí  
Sí  
Sí  
Puede hacer funciones de edición avanzadas (edición de lista a reproducir)  
No  
No  
*1  
El DVD-RW (modoVR) sólo puede reproducirse  
en equipos de DV compatibles conVR.  
Nota:  
Para más detalles sobre las funciones anteriores y las  
limitaciones implícitas, lea las explicaciones en este manual.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Español  
Fácil grabación de DVD (cont.)  
Paso 3: Seleccione la  
velocidad de  
Paso 4: Seleccione  
el canal  
Paso 5: Grabe en  
discos  
grabación  
Para seleccionar el  
deseado  
DVD  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
WXYZ  
VIDEO/TV  
8
9
1
SPACE  
0
SLOW  
modo DVD  
REC MODE  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
REC MODE  
E  
POWER  
2
REC SPEEDIO  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
REC/OT
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
RETURN  
.@/:  
1
SPACE  
0
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
ENTER  
REC MONITOR  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
MENU/LIST TOP MENU  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/T
S
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
1
CH 1  
Para seleccionar la  
2
velocidad de grabación  
SP 2:01 Rem.  
I
Sugerencia 1: Reproduzca el contenido grabado  
Puede seleccionar el título que desea reproducir de  
Parada grab.  
Inicio de grab.  
Parada/inicio  
un menú indicado y empiece a reproducir inmedi-  
atamente. El contenido grabado se puede acceder  
fácilmente con un simple procedimiento de elegir  
un título en un capítulo en la pantalla del menú.  
Paso 6: Pare la  
grabación  
Título 1  
Título 2  
¿Qué son títulos y capítulos?  
El contenido de un disco DVD se divide generalmente en  
títulos. Los títulos pueden dividirse a su vez en capítulos.  
Capítulo 1 Capítulo 2 Capítulo 3 Capítulo 1 Capítulo 2  
SPACE  
0
SLOW  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
Sugerencia 2: Edite el disco grabado  
PLAY  
La edición de discos es fácil. Esta unidad ofrece convenientes funciones de edi-  
ción que sólo son posibles con discos DVD-R/RW.  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
Puede editar lo siguiente de la lista de títulos.  
• Poniendo nombres en títulos  
ENTER  
REC MONITOR  
• Seleccionando imágenes para índices (modoVR)  
• Seleccionando/borrando marcadores de capítulos  
• Borrado de partes de títulos o escenas (modoVR)  
Title Delete: Esto borra permanentemente una escena completa del disco.  
Scene Delete: Esto permite que el usuario edite dentro de una escena específica  
(anuncios comerciales, por ejemplo).  
58%  
Original y Playlist (modoVR)  
Escrit de datos  
Puede editar las grabaciones en la lista a reproducir sin cambiar las grabaciones  
originales. Cualquier lista a reproducir no ocupa mucho espacio en el disco.  
¿Qué significa "Original" o "Playlist"?  
A lo largo de este manual encontrará Original y Playlist que se refieren a las  
grabaciones reales y la versión editada.  
• La grabación Original se refiere a la grabación real en el disco.  
• El Playlist se refiere a la versión editada del disco; cómo se va a reproducir la versión Original.  
Finalización de un disco  
•
Esto permitirá que un disco que se grabe en nuestra unidad pueda ser reproducido en un  
reproductor DVD diferente. Un disco sin finalizar no se podrá reproducir en otro reproductor  
.
Esta operación puede  
demorar en comple-  
tarse.  
• Después de finalizar un disco, si la grabación se hizo en el modo de vídeo,  
usted no podrá editar ninguna información que se encuentre en ese disco.  
• Si ha grabado en el modoVR en un disco DVD-RW, la edición podrá  
realizarse incluso después de la finalización.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Español  
Reproducción con videograbadora  
VCR  
3
REC MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
REC SPEED AUDIO  
1
Durante la reproducción, pre-  
1
.@/:  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
Presione el botón POWER en  
el mando a distancia o el  
panel frontal de la unidad.  
Cuando reproduzca una cinta,  
conecte el TV y asegúrese de  
seleccionar la entrada donde se  
conecta la unidad.  
sione el botón PAUSE F.  
Se hará una pausa de reproduc-  
ción y se silenciará el sonido.  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
SPACE  
0
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
4
3
5
PLAY  
Presione el botón PLAY  
B
2
4
STOP  
VCR  
para continuar la reproduc-  
ción.  
Presione:  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
REC MONITOR  
2
5
Coloque una cinta pregraba-  
da y presione el botón PLAY  
Nota  
Presione el botón STOP  
C
para detener la reproducción.  
B para empezar la reproduc-  
• Cuando se coloca una cinta  
ción.  
sin la lengüeta de grabación, la  
unidad empezará a reproducir  
automáticamente.  
6
Presione el botón  
• El seguimiento se ajustará  
automáticamente para la  
reproducción. Para ajustar  
manualmente el seguimiento,  
presione los botones CHAN-  
NEL K/L en el panel frontal  
de la unidad o los botones  
CHK/CHL en el mando a  
distancia.  
STOP/EJECT  
frontal de la unidad para  
expulsar la cinta.  
C
A en el panel  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Español  
Grabación y grabación con temporizador de un toque (VCR)  
Grabación  
CH  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
VCR  
Primero:  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
VIDEO/TV  
SLOW  
VCR  
SPACE  
0
Antes de grabar, asegúrese de que:  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
PAUSE  
•
Se seleccionó el canal deseado  
presionando los botones numéri-  
cos en el mando a distancia o  
botones CHANNEL K/L en el  
panel frontal de la unidad.  
Hay una cinta con la lengüeta  
para grabación intacta en la  
unidad.  
Se seleccionó la velocidad de  
grabación deseada en SP (repro-  
ducción estándar) o SLP (repro-  
ducción de super larga duración)  
presionando el botón REC  
MODE/REC SPEED en el mando  
a distancia.  
1
1
2
Presione el botón REC/OTR  
para empezar la grabación.  
Para detener temporalmente la  
grabación o continuarla, presione  
PLAY  
STOP  
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
1
ENTER  
REC MONITOR  
•
•
el botón PAUSE F. Después de  
que la unidad haya estado en el  
modo de pausa durante 5 minu-  
tos, se detendrá automáticamente  
para proteger al cinta y el cabezal  
de video contra cambios.  
Nota  
• Para ver un canal mientras  
graba en otro  
1) Mientras está grabando en  
la unidad, presione el botón  
VIDEO/TV.  
2) En la caja de cable o caja  
de satélite, seleccione el canal  
que desea ver.  
Si se conectó la unidad a una  
caja de cable o caja de  
satélite, consulte la sección de  
"Connection to a cable box  
or satellite box" en la página  
15.  
2
Presione el botón STOP cuan-  
do se complete la grabación.  
Velocidad de grabación:  
Velocidad  
de la cinta  
Tiempo de  
grabación/reproducción  
Prevención contra borrado accidental  
Para evitar una grabación por  
accidente en un casete grabado,  
rompa la lengüeta de grabación.  
Para volver a grabar posterior-  
Tipo de cinta  
Modo SP  
T60  
T120  
T160  
1 hora  
2 horas 2-2/3 horas  
Modo SLP  
3 horas  
6 horas  
8 horas  
Lengüeta de  
grabación  
•
Se selecciona Estéreo o SAP.  
mente, cubra el orificio con  
cinta adhesiva.  
Grabación con temporizador de un toque (OTR)  
PLAY  
VCR  
STOP  
1
REC/OTR  
SETUP  
TIMER PROG.  
Esta función permite seleccionar  
la longitud de la grabación simple-  
mente presionando el botón  
REC/OTR en el mando a distancia  
o en el panel frontal de la unidad.  
(0:30)  
(1:00)  
(Canal a grabar)  
1
Nota  
ENTER  
REC MONITOR  
(8:00)  
(7:30)  
Cuando termina la grabación con  
temporizador de un toque, la  
unidad se desconectará automáti-  
camente.  
•
El tiempo de grabación remanente apare-  
cerá en la pantalla durante una grabación  
con temporizador de un toque.  
Presione el botón DISPLAY para  
que aparezca en la pantalla de TV.  
No puede hacer una pausa en una  
grabación con temporizador de un toque.  
Si se termina el OTR en la  
videograbadora durante el modo  
de reproducción o REC en DVD,  
la videograbadora estará en el  
modo STOP y la DVD se  
mantiene en el modo actual.  
A diferencia de una grabación con tem-  
porizador, durante una grabación con  
temporizador de un toque usted puede  
realizar las operaciones siguientes.  
VCR  
Primero:  
1
Para cancelar la grabación con  
temporizador de un toque dentro  
del tiempo especificado, presione  
el botón STOP C.  
•
•
Durante la grabación normal,  
presione el botón REC/OTR  
para empezar la grabación  
con temporizador de un  
toque.  
Puede seleccionar un tiempo de  
grabación determinado presionan-  
do repetidamente el botón  
REC/OTR.  
•
-
-
Desconectar la alimentación  
Utilizar los botones REC o  
STOP  
C.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONSUMER LIMITED WARRANTY  
(Valid for warranty service in the U.S. only)  
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION warrants to the first consumer purchaser that this Sharp brand product (the  
“Product”), when shipped in its original container, will be free from defective workmanship and materials, and agrees that it  
will, at its option, either repair the defect or replace the defective Product or part thereof with a new or  
remanufactured equivalent at no charge to the purchaser for parts or labor for the period(s) set forth below.  
This warranty does not apply to any appearance items of the Product nor to the additional excluded item(s) set forth  
below nor to any Product the exterior of which has been damaged or defaced, which has been subjected to improper  
voltage or other misuse, abnormal service or handling, or which has been altered or modified in design or  
construction.  
In order to enforce the rights under this limited warranty, the purchaser should follow the steps set forth below and  
provide proof of purchase to the servicer.  
The limited warranty described herein is in addition to whatever implied warranties may be granted to purchasers by law.  
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR USE ARE  
LIMITED TO THE PERIOD(S) FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE SET FORTH BELOW. Some states do not allow  
limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you.  
Neither the sales personnel of the seller nor any other person is authorized to make any warranties other than those  
described herein, or to extend the duration of any warranties beyond the time period described herein on behalf of  
Sharp.  
The warranties described herein shall be the sole and exclusive warranties granted by Sharp and shall be the sole and  
exclusive remedy available to the purchaser. Correction of defects, in the manner and for the period of time described  
herein, shall constitute complete fulfillment of all liabilities and responsibilities of Sharp to the purchaser with respect to  
the Product, and shall constitute full satisfaction of all claims, whether based on contract, negligence, strict liability or  
otherwise. In no event shall Sharp be liable, or in any way responsible, for any damages or defects in the Product which  
were caused by repairs or attempted repairs performed by anyone other than an authorized servicer. Nor shall Sharp  
be liable or in any way responsible for any incidental or consequential economic or property damage. Some states do not  
allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion may not apply to you.  
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY  
FROM STATE TO STATE.  
Model Specific Section  
Your Product Model Number & Description:  
Warranty Period for this Product:  
DV-RW340U, DV-RW350U VCR/DVD Recorder Combination  
(Be sure to have this information available when you need service  
for your Product.)  
One (1) year parts and ninety (90) days labor from date of purchase.  
Non-rechargeable batteries.  
Additional Item(s) Excluded from warranty  
Coverage (if any):  
Where to Obtain Service:  
Call Sharp Electronics corporation toll free at 1-800-BE-SHARP for  
instructions on how to obtain service on your VCR/DVD Recorder  
combination.  
What to do to Obtain Service:  
Ship your product, prepaid, as per the instruction given by the Sharp  
representative at the toll free number (1-800-BE-SHARP). BE sure to  
have your proof of purchase available. Be sure to ship the product  
securely packaged and insured against shipping damage.  
TO OBTAIN SUPPLY, ACCESSORY OR PRODUCT INFORMATION, GO TO OUR WEBSITE AT www.sharpusa.com  
OR CALL 1-800-BE-SHARP.  
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION  
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, New Jersey 07430-2135  
SHARP CORPORATION  
Osaka, Japan  
9HS1VMN20224  
Printed in China  
E9434UD/E9435UD★★★★★  
1VMN20224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sharp DVR TU TV322H User Manual
Shoprider Mobility Aid UL7WR ULWR11 User Manual
Sony Camcorder PJ530E User Manual
Sony DVD Player S360 User Manual
Sony Laptop PCG F590K User Manual
Sony Personal Computer HID C10 User Manual
Sony VCR 1500A User Manual
Sunbeam Can Opener CA2800 User Manual
Sun Lawn Trimmer BTE 1 User Manual
Sun Microsystems Server X2250 User Manual